Carel WB000D series, WB000S series User Manual

UltraCella
Electronic control for Cold Rooms
User manual
NO POWER
& SIGNAL
CABLES
TOGETHER
READ CAREFULLY IN THE TEXT!
H i g h
E f f i c i e n c y
S o l u t i o n s
ENG
WARNING
DISPOSAL
CAREL developed its products thanks to the several years of experience in the
HVAC field, continuous investment in technological innovation of the product,
rigorous quality procedures and processes with in-circuit and function tests on
100% of its production, as well as the most innovative production technologies
available on the market. CAREL and its branch offices/affiliates do not guarantee,
in any case, that all the aspects of the product and the software included in the
product will respond to the demands of the final application, even if the product is
built according to state-of-the-art techniques.
The client (builder, developer or installer of the final equipment) assumes every
responsibility and risk relating to the configuration of the product in order to reach
the expected results in relation to the specific final installation and/or equipment.
CAREL, in this case, through specific agreements, can intervene as consultant for
the positive result of the final start-up machine/application, but in no case can it be
held responsible for the positive working of the final equipment/apparatus.
INFORMATION FOR THE USERS REGARDING THE CORRECT HANDLING OF
WASTE ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT (WEEE)
With reference to European Parliament and Council Directive 2002/96/EC issued
on 27 January 2003 and the related national implementation legislation, please
note that:
• WEEE cannot be disposed of as municipal waste, said waste must be collected
separately;
• the public or private waste collection systems defined by local legislation must
be used. Moreover, the equipment can be returned to the distributor at the end
of its working life when buying new equipment;
• this equipment may contain dangerous substances: improper use or incorrect
disposal of such may have negative effects on human health and on the
environment;
• the symbol (crossed-out wheeley bin) shown on the product or on the
packaging and on the instruction sheet indicates that the equipment has been
introduced onto the market after 13 August 2005 and that it must be disposed
of separately;
• in the event of illegal disposal of electrical and electronic waste, the penalties are
specified by local waste disposal legislation.
The CAREL product is a state-of-the-art product, whose operation is specified in the
technical documentation supplied with the product or can be downloaded, even
prior to purchase, from the website www.carel.com.
Each CAREL product, in relation to its advanced technological level, needs a phase
of definition / configuration / programming / commissioning so that it can function
at its best for the specific application. The lack of such phase of study, as indicated
in the manual, can cause the final product to malfunction of which CAREL cannot
be held responsible.
Only qualified personnel can install or carry out technical assistance interventions
on the product.
The final client must use the product only in the manner described in the
documentation related to the product itself.
Materials warranty: 2 years (from the date of production, excluding consumables).
Type-approval: the quality and safety of CAREL S.P.A. products are guaranteed by
the design system and ISO 9001 certified production.
Without excluding proper compliance with further warnings present in the manual,
it is stressed that in any case it is necessary, for each CAREL product:
• Not allow the electronic circuits getting wet. Rain, humidity and all types of
liquids or condensate contain corrosive mineral substances that can damage
the electrical circuits. In any case, the product should be used and stored in
environments that respect the temperature and humidity limits specified in the
manual;
• Not to install the device in a particularly hot environments. Temperatures that
are too high can shorten the duration of the electronic devices, damaging them
and distorting or melting the parts in plastic. In any case, the product should be
used and stored in environments that respect the temperature and humidity
limits specified in the manual;
• Not to try to open the device in any way different than that indicated in the
manual;
• Not to drop, hit or shake the device, because the internal circuits and
mechanisms could suffer irreparable damage.
• Not to use corrosive chemical products, aggressive solvents or detergents to
clean the device;
• Not to use the product in application environments different than those
specified in the technical manual.
HACCP: CAUTION
The Food Safety programs based on HACCP procedures and on certain national
standards, require that the devices used for food preservation are periodically
checked to make sure that the measuring errors are within the allowed limits of
the application of use.
Carel recommends compliance with the indications of European standard
“Temperature recorders and thermometers for transport, storage and distribution
of chilled, frozen, deep-frozen/ quick-frozen food and ice cream – PERIODIC
VERIFICATION “, EN 13486 -2001 (or subsequent updates)or similar standards and
prescriptions applicable in the country of use.
The manual contains further indications regarding technical feature, proper
installation and configuration of the product.
All the above reported suggestions are also valid for the control, serial boards,
programming keys or however for any other accessory in the CAREL product
portfolio.
CAREL adopts a continuous development policy. Therefore, CAREL reserves the
right to carry out modifications and improvements on any product described in
this document without prior notice.
The technical data in the manual can undergo modifications without forewarning.
NO POWER
& SIGNAL
CABLES
TOGETHER
The liability of CAREL in relation to its products is specified in the CAREL general
contract conditions, available on the website www.carel.com and/or by specific
agreements with customers; specifically, to the extent where allowed by applicable
legislation, in no case will CAREL, its employees or subsidiaries be liable for any
lost earnings or sales, losses of data and information, costs of replacement
goods or services, damage to things or people, downtime or any direct, indirect,
incidental, actual, punitive, exemplary, special or consequential damage of any
kind whatsoever, whether contractual, extra-contractual or due to negligence, or
any other liabilities deriving from the installation, use or impossibility to use the
product, even if CAREL or its subsidiaries are warned of the possibility of such
damage.
READ CAREFULLY IN THE TEXT!
WARNING: separate the probe cables and the digital input cables as
much as possible from the inductive load and power cables to prevent
possible electro-magnetic interference. Never introduce power cables
and signal cables (including those of electric control board) into the same
cable troughs.
3
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
Content
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1
1.2
Humidity management......................................................................................58
Deumidificazione ...................................................................................................59
Generic functions ...................................................................................................61
Configurazione uscite .........................................................................................63
7. PARAMETERS TABLE
65
8. SIGNALS AND ALARMS
76
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
Signalling .....................................................................................................................76
Alarms............................................................................................................................76
Reset alarms...............................................................................................................76
HACCP alarms and display ...............................................................................76
EVD EVO alarms .......................................................................................................77
EVDice alarms ...........................................................................................................77
3PH module alarms...............................................................................................78
Alarm parameters ..................................................................................................79
HACCP Alarm parameters and monitoring activation .................80
High condenser temperature alarm .........................................................80
9. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
20
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
Display ...........................................................................................................................20
Keyboard .....................................................................................................................21
Programming............................................................................................................22
Procedures ..................................................................................................................24
Multifunction menu .............................................................................................26
Message language selection ..........................................................................30
4. COMMISSIONING
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
9
Assembly and sizes (mm) ...................................................................................9
Structure ......................................................................................................................10
Wiring diagram ........................................................................................................11
Expansion modules assembly ........................................................................12
Ultra EVD module...................................................................................................14
Ultra Power module..............................................................................................15
EVDice ...........................................................................................................................16
Ultra 3ph module EVAPORATOR ...................................................................16
Ultra 3ph module FULL ......................................................................................17
Installation ..................................................................................................................18
Connection in supervisoring network ......................................................18
UltraCella Service terminal ...............................................................................19
Upload/download parameters (USB memory key) .........................19
3. USER INTERFACE
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
6.17
6.18
6.19
6.20
Codes ................................................................................................................................7
Expansion modules .................................................................................................8
2. INSTALLATION
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
7
UltraCella technical characteristics..............................................................81
EVD Modules technical characteristics .....................................................82
Power Modules technical characteristics ................................................82
3PH EVAPORATOR Modules technical characteristics .....................82
3PH FULL Modules technical characteristics ........................................83
10. ELECTRICAL WIRING 3PH MODULES
31
81
84
10.1 Electrical wiring 3PH EVAPORATOR Module ..........................................84
10.2 Electrical wiring 3PH FULL Module .............................................................91
First commissioning .............................................................................................31
Parameters to be set for the commissioning........................................31
Single digit display models cod. WB000S* commissioning.........31
Double digit display models cod. WB000D* commissioning ...32
Commissioning with UltraCella Service Terminal ..............................32
Main function commissioning .......................................................................33
Light management ...............................................................................................37
Other configuration parameters ..................................................................37
Ultra EVD EVO module commissioning ...................................................39
EVDice commissioning .......................................................................................40
Ultra 3Ph Evaporator module commissioning.....................................42
Ultra 3Ph Full module commissioning......................................................43
11. SOFTWARE RELEASE
99
11.1 Software release table .........................................................................................99
5. OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION AND PROTECTIONS 44
5.1
5.2
Analogue output ....................................................................................................44
Digital Outputs ........................................................................................................44
6. CONTROL
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
45
Switching the controller ON and OFF ......................................................45
Virtual probe..............................................................................................................45
Set point.......................................................................................................................45
Pump down ...............................................................................................................47
Autostart in pump down ..................................................................................48
Continuous cycle....................................................................................................48
Door switch control ..............................................................................................48
Defrost...........................................................................................................................49
Evaporator Fans .......................................................................................................51
Condenser fans........................................................................................................53
Duty setting ...............................................................................................................55
Bowl resistance ........................................................................................................55
Defrosting with 2 evaporators .......................................................................55
Second compressor with rotation ...............................................................56
Control with dead band.....................................................................................57
AUX output activation by time band.........................................................57
5
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
1. INTRODUCTION
Ultracella is a family of products consisting of a control system for the
basic functions of a cold room to which can be added further modules for
accessory functionalities (e.g. electronic valve, power relays, etc.).
The accessory modules allow:
• the installation of the electronic expansion valve, using the module
with CAREL EVD Evolution driver dedicated to the control of superheat;
• compressor control with power relay of up to 3 Hp;
• the use of a single-phase circuit breaker switch in addition to the
power relay.
The user interface ensures ease in use and it consists, depending on the
models, of:
• wide led display on which can be viewed the operating temperature
and the active loads;
• a graphic terminal with text strings in multiple languages, which
guide the user during commissioning (wizard). It is also equipped with
contextual help menus accessible during programming, that provide
an accurate description of the alarms.
The graphic terminal is also available as a “service tool”, which is useful
when the control has the only LED interface.
UltraCella has a port for the insertion of a USB memory key to:
• load the languages for the graphic terminal during the first
commissioning;
• parameters upload/download;
• other operations reserved for the service centre (e.g. software update);
• download log of temperature recorded.
UltraCella
When mounting the optional modules are matched to the right of the
main control system and connected to it with watertight coupling, to
ensure the IP degree of protection of the assembly.
Fig. 1.a
Main characteristics:
• 6 relay outputs: compressor, defrost, fan, light, AUX1, AUX2;
• assembly on guide DIN or wall;
• LED board with bright display with 3 digits, with decimal point and
icons that indicate the operating status;
• integration of the keys in the front panel (LED board) to ensure a high
degree of protection (IP65) and safety during operation and cleaning;
• availability of 10 sets of parameters (recipes) preloaded by CAREL
but modifiable, corresponding to the same number of parameters
configurations, to adapt the control to the specific conservation needs
required by the cold room;
• navigation on intuitive user interface with contextual backlight
keyboard;
• defrost can be driven using the keyboard, digital input and supervisor;
• various types of defrost managements, on one or two evaporators:
natural (with stop compressor), resistance, hot gas;
• control of compressors with up to 2 Hp or up to 3 Hp with the
accessory power module;
• temperature control with virtual adjustment probe;
• digital inputs that can be configurated for alarm activation, enabling or
activating defrost, door switch, auxiliary output, on / off, etc;
• control of 1 compressor with double step or of two compressors, even
with rotation;
• keyboard safety: operation of the single keys can be disabled to avoid
tampering;
• light management by door switch or dedicated key;
• alarm buzzer;
• HACCP function: temperature monitoring and adjustment in case of
alarm due to high temperature during operation or after black out;
• RS485 network connection for remote monitoring and supervision
sytems.
1.1 Part numbers
P/N
WB000S**F0
WB000D**F0
Description
UltraCella, led display with single row
UltraCella, led display with double row
Tab. 1.a
Fig. 1.b
7
Fig. 1.c
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
1.2 Expansion modules
EVD Module (P/N WM00E***00)
Expansion module containing the supply transformer and the driver EVD
Evo to control the electronic expansion valve.
P/N
WM00ENS000
WM00ENSI00
WM00ENNI00
WM00EUN000
Description
Ultra EVD Module without EVD display
Ultra EVD Module with EVD I/E display
“Closed” Ultra EVD module - commissioning with UltraCella
“Closed” Ultra EVD module with Ultracap – commissioning
with UltraCella
WM00EUS000 Ultra EVD module with Ultracap without EVD display
WM00EUK000 “Closed” Ultra EVD module with Ultracap, stand-alone commissioning with UltraCella
WM00EUC000 Ultra EVD module without EVD display with Ultracap, standalone
Tab. 1.b
Fig. 1.d
Three phases expansion Modules
Ultra 3PH Evaporator Modules are expansion modules to control threephase evaporators. They have to be combined with UltraCella controls
P/Ns WB000S% or WB000D% and have inside high power actuators to
handle directly three-phase loads of the evaporator.
Ultra 3PH Full Modules are expansion modules to control three-phase
condensing and evaporator units. They have to be combined with
UltraCella controls P/Ns WB000S% or WB000D% and have inside high
power actuators to handle directly three-phase loads of the condensing
and evaporator units.
Fig. 1.a
Fig. 1.b
P/N
WT00E600N0
WT00E900N0
WT00EA00N0
WT00F4B0N0
WT00F7C0N0
Fig. 1.c
Description
Ultra 3PH Evaporator module 6kW
Ultra 3PH Evaporator module 9kW
Ultra 3PH Evaporator module 20 kW
Ultra 3PH module Full 4HP
Ultra 3PH module Full 7,5Hp
Tab. 1.d
Power module (P/N WM00P000*N)
Expansion module that contains the circuit breaker switch and 3 Hp relay
for compressor control. There is also a version without relay, to give way
to the installer to insert devices suitable for the application (contactors,
safety devices, etc.)
P/N
Description
WM00P0003N Ultra Power Module main switch and 3HP relay
WM00P000NN Ultra Power Module main switch
Tab. 1.c
Fig. 1.e
Fig. 1.f
UltraCella Service Terminal
The UltraCella control can be connected to an external terminal, without
having to open the unit, for easy commissioning and programming of
the control parameters, to be used with the controls having LED display.
When connecting the UltraCella Service Terminal the LED interface is
temporarily disabled.
P/N
PGDEWB0FZ0
PGDEWB0FZK
Fig. 1.d
Three-phase power modules (P/N WT00S*00N0)
Power 3PH Modules are expansion modules for controlling a single threephase load, usually the defrost heater. They include a pre-wired threephase contactor and a four-pole circuit breaker.
P/N
WT00SB00N0
WT00SC00N0
WT00SD00N0
Description
Power 3PH module with circuit breaker, defrost 6A
Power 3PH module with circuit breaker, defrost 10A
Power 3PH module with circuit breaker, defrost 16A
Tab. 1.a
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
Description
UltraCella Service with pGD1 user interface
UltraCella Service with pGD1 user interface + 3 m.
cable and S90CONN001 connector
Tab. 1.e
Fig. 1.e
8
ENG
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 Assembly and sizes (mm)
The control system has holes on the lower and right side, in which the
installer can insert the cable glands.
290
87,5
47,5
30
47,5
107,5
N
32
200
62
100
62
380
Fig. 2.a
Fig. 2.b
Mounting
B: without DIN rail
1
260
A: with DIN rail
2
Ø 4,5
156
1.a: Fix the DIN rail and insert the controller
1.b: Make 4 holes (Ø 4,5 mm) according to the drilling
template and insert the dowels (mm)
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
2.a: Remove the frames, loosen the screws (1) and open the panel
2.b: Remove the frames
9
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
A
A
1
2
1
1
B
2
N
1
2
1
1
B A
A
3.a: Mark on the wall the positions of the lower holes,
remove the panel and perform the drills (Ø 4.5 mm); insert
the plugs. Replace the panel on the DIN guide and fix it
fastening the lower screws.
1
2
3.b: Fasten the screws (1) and fix the panel. Loosen the screws (2) and open the panel.
2
connection
to option
modules
N
A
power supply, compressor
fan, actuators
4: Use the holes and mount the cable glands to connect:
• on the lower side: supply cables, probes, actuators;
• on the right side: cables for the connection of accessory
modules;
5: Close the panel fastening the screws (2).
probes,
digital inputs
Caution: separate the power cables (supply, actuators) from the signal cables
(probes, digital inputs).
Note: use a hole saw to drill the knock-outs (A).
2.2 Structure
Models with single digit display cod. WB000S*
3
4
3
2
1
Key
3
8 7 6 5
4
1 Keyboard
2 Display
3 Wall mounting holes
4 Locking screws
5 Connector for UltraCella Service (*)
6 Green LED (*)
7 Red LED (*)
8 USB Port (*)
(*) Visible after removing the bottom frame
3
Fig. 2.c
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
10
ENG
Models with double digit display cod. WB000D*
3
4
3
2
1
Key
3
8 7 6 5
4
1 Keyboard
2 Display
3 Wall mounting holes
4 Locking screws
5 Connector for UltraCella Service (*)
6 Green LED (*)
7 Red LED (*)
8 USB port (*)
(*) Visible after removing the bottom frame
3
Fig. 2.d
2.3 Wiring diagram
to remote terminal display
VL
GND
GND
Rx/Tx+
Rx/TxGND
Key
to LED display board
48 47 46 45 44 43
49 50 51 52 53 54
Rx/Tx+
Rx/TxGND
Rx/Tx+
Rx/TxGND
GND
FieldBus BMS
to graphic
terminal display
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
24 Vac
UltraCella Control
R6
EN60730-1
250 V
UL 873
R5 - R6
12 (10) A
12 A res. 2HP
12FLA 72 LRA
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
CAREL NTC, PT1000
CAREL NTC, PT1000
CAREL NTC, PT1000
analog output (0 to 10 Vdc)
CAREL NTC, analog input 0 to 10 Vdc
0 to 5 Vdc
DI1
Door switch
18
17
16
15
R5
B3
B2
B1
Y1
B4
B5
GND
5 VREF
+ Vdc
DI1
DI2
DI3
14
13
CMP
DEF
OUT
B5 analog
M
input
+V
(4 to 20 mA)
B1…B5
DI1
DI2, DI3
Y1
GND
5 VREF
Analogue inputs 1…5
Door switch
Digital inputs 2, 3
0…10 V analogue output
Grounding for signals
Ratiometric pressure
probe power supply
+Vdc
Active probe supply
(humidity)
CMP
DO1 (*) Compressor
DEF
DO2 (*) Defrost
FAN
DO3 (*) Evaporator fan
LIGHT
DO4 (*) Light
AUX1
DO5 (*) Auxiliary
output 1
AUX2
DO6 (*) Auxiliary
output 2
L, N
Power Supply
Fieldbus Fieldbus Serial (19200
Baud, 8 bit, 2 bit stop, no
parity)
BMS
BMS Serial
(*) Digital outputs display in the
multifunction module (see chap. 3).
12
to connector board
EN60730-1
250 V
UL 873
EN60730-1
250 V
UL 873
R3 - R4
10 A res.
5 (3) A
10 A res. 5FLA
18 LRA
R1 - R2
8 (4) A N.O.
8 A res. 2FLA
12 LRA
R4
11
FAN
10
R3
R2
9
LIGHT
8
7
6
R1
5
4
3
2
1
230 V
20 A max
Fig. 2.e
11
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
2.4 Expansion modules assembly
Dimensions (mm)
30
Layout
If more than one expansion modules it is to assemble, use the
arrangement of figure to optimize the wiring.
30
47,5
47,5
Power Module
107,5
107,5
260
290
Ø32
drilling template
Ø32
Ø 4,5
47,5
128
EVD Module
87,5
87,5
UltraCella Control
1
2
47,5
110
WM00ENS000
WM00ENSI00
101
103
WM00ENNI00
Fig. 2.f
Fig. 2.h
43
33
Overall drilling template (mm)
If UltraCella and expansion modules have to be mounted at the same
time, use the overall drilling template.
UltraCella
Expansion
Module
214
260
DIN RAIL
Ø 4,5 mm
156
24
103
Fig. 2.g
Mounting
A
1
B
3
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
2
1
1: Use a hole saw to drill the panel in correspondence with the predrilled
holes (steps A, B). If present, fasten the DIN rail for the module.
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
2: Remove the faceplates. Unscrew the screws (3) and open the
UltraCella control
12
ENG
1
1
1
A
A
B A
A
2
B
1
N
2
1
1
3: Raise the cover or remove the faceplates and unscrew the screws to
remove the panel and open the module.
4: Put the module close to UltraCella control and insert the coupling
clamps supplied as standard.
13
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
2.5 Ultra EVD module
Mounting with DIN rail
Mounting without DIN rail
5.a Mark the positions of the bottom holes on the wall (A), remove the
coupling clamps (B), extract the module (C). Drill the corresponding holes
(Ø 4,5 mm) and insert the anchors. Place again the module: mount the
coupling clamps (B) and fasten the screws (A).
5.b Mark the positions of the 4 holes (A), remove the coupling clamps
(B), extract the module (C). Drill the corresponding holes (Ø 4,5 mm),
depending on drilling template and insert the anchors. Place again the
module: mount the coupling clamps (B) and fasten the screws (A).
B A
B
A
2
4
N
1
3
2
4
NOA
B
COMA
3
G
G0
VBAT
1
G
G0
VBAT
N
PRI 230 V
NOA
B
COMA
PRI 230 V
SEC 24 V
SEC 24 V
GND
S1
DI1
DI2
S4
VREF
S2
S3
C
GND
S1
DI1
DI2
VREF
S4
S2
S3
GND
C
GND
Tx/Rx
Tx/Rx
B A
B A
A
A
Fig. 2.j
Fig. 2.i
WM00ENNI00, WM00EUN000 and WM00EUK000: Connect UltraCella to EVD module by serial cable in according with following wiring diagram e refer to
below parameters table about EVD Evo driver commissioning.
WM00ENSI00, WM00ENS000, WM00EUS000 and WM00EUC000:
1. Driver commissioning by EVD Evo display.
Connect auxiliary UltraCella output AUX1 or AUX2 relay to digital input DI1 of EVD Evo and set parameters in this way:
• H1=7 (for AUX1) or H5=7 (for AUX2) -> second delayed compressor
• C11=0 -> delay activation second compressor = 0
In this way auxiliary output is set like free contact cooling request, suitable to be connected to digital input DI1 of EVD Evo driver. No setting is requested
in UltraCella.
2. EVD Evo driver commissioning by UltraCella
Connect UltraCella to EVD module by serial cable in according with following wiring diagram e refer to below parameters table about EVD Evo driver
commissioning. If its’ connected by serial cable, driver parameters can be displayed only (not modifiable) by local EVD Evo display.
Once driver is abled by UltraCella (parameter P1=1) its parameters are ones communicated and set by UltraCella, in according with below parameters
table (modifiable by UltraCella only); parameters eventually previously set by EVD Evo display will be lost.
CAREL
ExV
ULTRACELLA CONTROL
ULTRA EVD MODULE BLIND
cod. WM00ENNI00
VL
GND
GND
Rx/Tx+
Rx/TxGND
bianco/white
FieldBus BMS
B3
B2
B1
Y1
B4
B5
GND
5 VREF
+ Vdc
DI1
DI2
DI3
verde/green
marrone/brown
CAREL NTC, PT1000
CAREL NTC, PT1000
CAREL NTC, PT1000
analog output (0 to 10 Vdc, PWM)
CAREL NTC, analog input 0 to 10 Vdc
0 to 5 Vdc
giallo/yellow
OUT B5 analog input
M (4 to 20 mA)
+V
Door switch
25 VA
2 AT
18
24 Vac
UltraCella Control
R6
EN60730-1
250 V
UL 873
R5 - R6
12 (10) A
12 A res. 2HP
12FLA 72 LRA
1
3
2
4
17
16
CMP
15
R5
S
shield
24 Vac
(**)
DI1
NOA
Rx/Tx+
Rx/TxGND
Rx/Tx+
Rx/TxGND
GND
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
COMA
49 50 51 52 53 54
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
G
G0
VBAT
48 47 46 45 44 43
14
DEF
13
12
R4
FAN
11
10
EVD Module
5
4
ratiometric pressure
transducer
3
2
1
230 V
20 A
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
NTC
Fig. 2.k
14
DI1
DI2
6
R1
S4
GND
7
EN60730-1
250 V
UL 873
R1 - R2
8 (4) A N.O.
8 A res. 2FLA
12 LRA
S3
8
S2
R2
LIGHT
9
S1
R3
VREF
EN60730-1
250 V
UL 873
R3 - R4
10 A res.
5 (3) A
10 A res. 5FLA
18 LRA
GND Tx/Rx
ENG
2.6 Ultra Power module
Mounting with DIN rail
Mounting without DIN rail
5.a Mark the positions of the bottom holes (A), remove the coupling
clamps (B), extract the module (C). Drill the corresponding holes (Ø 4,5
mm) and insert the anchors. Place again the module: mount the coupling
clamps (B) and fasten the screws (A).
5.b Mark on the wall the positions of the 4 holes (A), remove the coupling
clamps (B), extract the module (C). Drill the corresponding holes (Ø 4,5
mm), depending on drilling template and insert the anchors Place again
the module: mount the coupling clamps (B) and fasten the screws (A).
B
A
A
B
B
C
N
2
B
3
6
C
N
5
2
3
6
B
A
5
A
B
Fig. 2.l
A
A
Fig. 2.m
Connect electrically the mudule wiring according to the diagram.
ULTRACELLA CONTROL
ULTRA POWER MODULE
VL
GND
GND
Rx/Tx+
Rx/TxGND
Power
Module
48 47 46 45 44 43
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
49 50 51 52 53 54
Rx/Tx+
Rx/TxGND
Rx/Tx+
Rx/TxGND
GND
FieldBus BMS
to graphic
terminal display
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
B3
B2
B1
Y1
B4
B5
GND
5 VREF
+ Vdc
DI1
DI2
DI3
CMP
CAREL NTC, PT1000
CAREL NTC, PT1000
CAREL NTC, PT1000
analog output (0 to 10 Vdc, PWM)
CAREL NTC, analog input 0 to 10 Vdc
230 V~
L
N
OUT
B5 analog input
M
0 to 5 Vdc
(4 to 20 mA)
+V
(**)
DI1
1 2 PE
Circuit
Breaker
Door switch
BROWN
CYAN
18
24 Vac
UltraCella Control
BROWN
R6
EN60730-1
250 V
UL 873
R5 - R6
12 (10) A
12 A res. 2HP
12FLA 72 LRA
CYAN
17
RED
16
Relay 3Hp (*)
15
CYAN
R5
14
DEF
6
3
FAN
5
2
2
3
13
12
EN60730-1
250 V
UL 873
R3 - R4
10 A res.
5 (3) A
10 A res. 5FLA
18 LRA
R4
11
6
R3
R2
9
LIGHT
8
7
EN60730-1
250 V
UL 873
to connector
board
R1 - R2
8 (4) A N.O.
8 A res. 2FLA
12 LRA
5
10
2
6
R1
6
5
4
3
5
BROWN
3
2
1
230 V
20 A max
(*) Note: highlighted wires and 3hp relay supplied with the module code
WM00P0003N
Fig. 2.n
15
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
2.7 EVDice
For details on assembling EVD ICE on the evaporator, see the user manual,
+0300037EN
Connect UltraCella to the EVD ICE driver via the Fieldbus serial line (RS485
Modbus protocol), as shown in the following wiring diagram, and refer to
the parameter table for the driver configuration
VL
GND
GND
Rx/Tx+
Rx/TxGND
to LED display board
48 47 46 45 44 43
49 50 51 52 53 54
Rx/Tx+
Rx/TxGND
Rx/Tx+
Rx/TxGND
GND
BMS
to graphic
terminal
FieldBus
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
CAP
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
B3
B2
B1
Y1
B4
B5
GND
5 VREF
+ Vdc
DI1
DI2
DI3
CAREL NTC, PT1000
CAREL NTC, PT1000
CAREL NTC, PT1000
B
Non rimuovere il cappuccio di
protezione!
Do not remove the protection cap!
ULTRACAP
Module
analog output (0 to 10 Vdc, PWM)
C D
CAREL NTC, analog input 0 to 10 Vdc
0 to 5 Vdc
OUT B5 analog
M input
+V (4 to 20 mA)
CAREL E2V / E3V
unipolar valve
A
(**)
DI1
Door switch
18
24 Vac
R6
EN60730-1
250 V
UL 873
R5 - R6
12 (10) A
12 A res. 2HP
12FLA 72 LRA
17
16
15
R5
S2 S1
CMP
14
GASType
DEF
13
Mode
Super Heat
12
EN60730-1
250 V
UL 873
R3 - R4
10 A res.
5 (3) A
10 A res. 5FLA
18 LRA
R4
11
FAN
10
R3
R2
9
LIGHT
8
to connector board
7
EN60730-1
250 V
UL 873
R1 - R2
8 (4) A N.O.
8 A res. 2FLA
12 LRA
6
R1
5
4
E
F
3
marrone / brown L
blu / blue N
nero / black DI
verde/ green GND
Tx / Rxnero / black
bianco / white Tx / Rx+
2
1
230 V
20 A max
230 Vac
shield
shield
Fig. 2.o
2.8 Ultra 3ph module EVAPORATOR
1. Following drilling template, drill 4 (6) holes on the wall:
Important:
• Unscrew 6 fixing screws of frontal cover
• Remove frontal cover
• Fix panel to the wall by using screws with suitable length to wall
• separate the power cable (power supply, actuators) from the signal
cables (probes, digital inputs) and serial cable
• use cable with section suitable to current rating they have to carry
• connect clamp marked with PE to the ground of power supply system
thickness
• Drill side surface of expansion module where it’s necessary and fit
cable glands to connect: power supply cables, serial cable, probes
and power cables for loads
2. Connect three-phase expansion to UltraCella by shielded serial cable
AWG 22
3. Close frontal by screwing the 6 screws
4. Power on UltraCella (230 Vac) and expansion three-phase module (400
Vac)
160
290
5. Activate magnetothermic switch.
300
Fig. 2.p
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
16
1
M
P
L
N
1
M
P
P
17
48
47
46
40
129
TC1
PE109
162
161
160
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
24
25
24
32
34
35
32
29
33
30
31
27
29
28
28
25
24
25
26
48
47
46
40
45
40
42
40
41
40
39
Ultra 3PH
I/O module
45
40
42
40
41
40
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
18
21
37
38
KM3:A1
XA1:122
KM3:A2/XA1:129
??:J12/NC6/XA1:113
XA1:127/KR2:A2
??:J2/U1
XA1:143
??:J2/U2
XA1:145/XA1:141
??:J2/U3
??:J2/GND/XA1:143
??:J2/U6
KR1:11
AP:AP:+
AP:GND
TC1:PE
Unscrew 6 fixing screws of frontal cover
Remove frontal cover
Fix panel to the wall by using screws with suitable length to wall thickness
Drill side surface of expansion module where it’s necessary and fit
cable glands to connect: power supply cables, serial cable, probes
and power cables for loads
39
24
25
113
112
114
20
18
XA1:103
QF2:N2/XA1:106
XA1:101/KM3:14
XA1:105
XA1:104
XA1:108/XA1:102
KM3:62
XA1:106
KR2:11
KR2:14
FU2:2/XA1:113
KR1:A2/FU1:2
XA1:128/XA1:111
XA1:115
XA1:114
KR1:A1
??:J10/NO1
KM2:A1
??:J10/NO2
KM1:A1
??:J11/C3/4/5
XA1:126/??:J11/NO3
AUX 1
AUX 1
termostato di sicurezza
termostato di sicurezza
Clicson evaporatore
Clicson evaporatore
UltraCella
UltraCella
defrost
defrost
defrost aux
defrost aux
ventilatore evaporatore 0-10 Vdc
ventilatore evaporatore 0-10 Vdc
consenso unita' motocondensante
consenso unita' motocondensante
controllo
controllo
controllo
AUX1:1
AUX1:2
TS1
TS1
SP3
SP3
AP3:L
AP3:N
ST1
ST1
ST2
ST2
Y
TS2:Y
GND
TS2:GND
AUX2:1
AUX2:2
AP1:J6/+
AP1:J6/+
GND AP1:J6/GND
34
33
32
24
25
29
31
29
30
29
28
15
16
22
19
20
18
26
27
PE3
PE2
PE1
162
161
160
149
148
147
146
143
142
141
140
129
128
120
119
118
117
110
109
17
34
33
32
24
25
29
31
29
30
29
28
15
16
22
19
20
18
26
27
CAREL NTC, PT1000
CAREL NTC, PT1000
CAREL NTC, PT1000
24
32
34
35
35
33
30
31
27
29
28
28
25
111
110
109
108
107
106
105
20
19
18
19
LIGHT
24
25
37
38
18
21
18
20
101
103
102
0 to 5Vdc
B5
analog
input
(4 to 20 mA)
104
analog output (0 to 10 Vdc, PWM)
CAREL NTC, analog input 0 to 10 Vdc
19
DEF
TK1
TK1
YV1
YV1
ULTRACELLA:L
ULTRACELLA:N
ST1
ST1
ST2
ST2
ST3
ST3
Y
7AP1:Y
GND 7AP1:GND
AP1:J6/+
AP1:J6/+
GND AP1:J6/GND
19
CAREL NTC, PT1000
CAREL NTC, PT1000
CAREL NTC, PT1000
18
0 to 5Vdc
20
to connector board
analog output (0 to 10 Vdc, PWM)
CAREL NTC, analog input 0 to 10 Vdc
pump down
pump down
liquid valve
liquid valve
ultracella
ultracella
defrost
defrost
defrost aux
defrost aux
temp condensatore
temp condensatore
fan evaporatore 0-10vdc
fan evaporatore 0-10vdc
controller
controller
controller
LIGHT
MV3:1
MV3:2
SP1
SP1
MV4:1
MV4:2
RR2
RR2
AUX1:1
AUX1:2
AP2:L
AP2:N
AP2:11
AP2:14
SP2
SP2
TS1
TS1
SP3
SP3
160
290
•
•
•
•
condenser fan 1
condenser fan 1
partialization pressure switch condenser fan
partialization pressure switch condenser fan
condenser fan 2
condenser fan 2
crankcase heater
crankcase heater
aux 1
aux 1
kriwan
kriwan
kriwan
kriwan
pressure switch
pressure switch
security thermostat
security thermostat
evaporator clicson
evaporator clicson
to connector board
ENG
KR2
AP1
KR3
B5
analog
input
(4 to 20 mA)
AP1
KM2
XA1
KR3
KR
R3
KM3
XA1
KM1
KM2
QF1
I/O module
CMP
FAN
QF2
XP1
X
Fig. 2.q
2.9 Ultra 3ph module FULL
1. Following drilling template, drill 4 (6) holes on the wall:
• separate the power cable (power supply, actuators) from the signal
Important:
• use cable with section suitable to current rating they have to carry
• connect clamp marked with PE to the ground of power supply system
• after powering on three-phase expansion check the correct rating
cables (probes, digital inputs) and serial cable
current absorption on the loads
2. Connect three-phase expansion to UltraCella by shielded serial cable
AWG 22
300
Fig. 2.r
KR2
KM1
FAN
XP1
QF1
CMP
DEF
QF2
QM1
63
70
80
90
Fig. 2.s
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
3. Close frontal by screwing the 6 screws
4. At the first start-up of the unit, it’s suggested to calibrate motor circuit
HACCP - CAUTION
When the temperature measurement is relevant for Food Safety (see
HACCP), will be used only temperature probes suggested by Carel. The
standards in force may require the compilation and preservation of
appropriate documentation, as well as periodic checks on instrumentation
and sensors. If in doubt, consult the person in charge of food safety or the
manager of the plant.
breaker on effective compressor absorption rating
2.11 Connection in supervisoring network
Warnings:
• properly fix the converter to avoid disconnections;
• perform the wiring without power supply;
• keep the cables of the converter CVSTDUMOR0 separate from power
cables (supply and relay outputs).
The RS485 converter allows you to connect to the UltraCella control
network to the monitoring network for complete control and monitoring
of controls connected. The system provides a maximum of 207 units with
a maximum length of 1000 m. For the connection it is requested the
accessory standard (RS485-USB converter cod. CAREL CVSTDUMOR0) and
a terminating resistor of 120 Ω to be placed on the terminals connected
to the last control. Connect RS485 converter to the controls as shown in
the figure. For assigning the serial address see the parameter H0. See the
instruction sheet of the converter for further information.
5. Power on UltraCella (230Vac) and expansion three-phase module
(400Vac)
6. Activate magnetothermic switch and motor circuit breaker
2.10 Installation
Proceed as follows for installation, making reference to the wiring
diagrams in the previous paragraphs:
1. Connect the supply and probes: the probes can be remote-controlled up
to a maximum distance of 10 metres from the controller as long as
cables with minimum section of 1 mm2 are used.
2. Program the control: as indicated in chapter“Commissioning”and“User
interface”;
3. Connect the actuators: the actuators should only be connected after
having programmed the controller. It is recommended to carefully
evaluate the maximum capacities of the relays indicated in table
“Technical specifications”.
4. Connection to the serial network (if present): all controls are fitted with a
serial connector for connection to the supervisory network.
Warnings: avoid installing UltraCella control system in environments with
the following characteristics:
• relative humidity over 90% non-condensing;
• strong vibrations or knocks;
• exposure to continuous jets of water;
• exposure to aggressive and polluting atmospheric agents (e.g.: sulphur
and ammonia gases, saline mist, smoke) to avoid corrosion and/or
oxidation;
• high magnetic and/or radio frequency interference (e.g. near
transmitting antennas);
• exposure of the control system to direct sunlight and atmospheric
agents in general.
CVSTDUMOR0
USB-485
Converter
TT+
GND
T+
TGND
to BMS
port
UltraCella ...n
The following recommendations must be respected when connecting
the controllers:
Warnings:
• incorrect connection of the power supply may seriously damage the
control system;
• use cable ends that are suitable for the terminals. Loosen every screw
and fit the cable end, next tighten the screws and gently pull the cables
to check their tightness. If using an automatic screwdriver, adjust the
torque to a value less than 0.5 N · m;
• separate as much as possible (by at least 3 cm) the probe signal and
digital input cables from inductive loads and power cables, to avoid
any electromagnetic disturbance. Never lay power cables and probe
cables in the same cable conduits (including those for the electrical
panels). Do not install the probe cables in the immediate vicinity of
power devices (contactors, circuit breakers or other). Reduce the
length of the sensor cables as much as possible, and avoid spirals
around power devices;
• only use IP67 guaranteed probes as end defrost probes; place the
probes with the vertical bulb upwards, so as to facilitate drainage of
any condensate. Remember that the thermistor temperature probes
(NTC) have no polarity, so the order of connection of terminals is not
important.
120 Ω
T+
TGND
to BMS
port
Fig. 2.t
UltraCella can be connected to both PlantVisor and PlantWatch via BMS
port (RS485).
Starting from 1.5 release software, both CAREL and Modbus protocols are
available from BMS port, selectable by H7 parameter.
- H7 = 0 CAREL protocol
- H7 = 1 Modbus protocol
Starting from software release 1.7, the baud rate, stop bits and parity of
the BMS port can be set using parameters H10, H11 and H12; the data bits
setting on the other hand remains fixed at 8.
Caution: in order to ensure the safety of the unit in the event of
serious alarms, all the electromechanical safety devices required
to guarantee correct operation must be fitted on the unit.
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
UltraCella 1
USB
18
ENG
Par.
H10
H11
H12
Description
BMS baud rate bit/s
0
1200
1
2400
2
4800
3
9600
4
19200
BMS stop bits
1
1 bit stop
2
2 bit stop
BMS parity
1
odd
2
even
Procedure:
Def Min Max U.M.
4
0
9
5
6
7
8
9
1. remove the lower frame and insert the USB memory key. The red and
38400
57600
76800
115200
375000
2.
2
1
2
-
3.
0
0
2
-
4.
5.
6.
7.
Note: To make the change active, switch on and switch off the unit.
8.
2.12 UltraCella Service terminal
The UltraCella Service Terminal has to be connected via a dedicated
connector, that can be accessed after removing the lower frame
Using the “UltraCella Service Terminal” you can:
• during the first commissioning: insert the first configuration parameters
following the guided procedure (wizard);
• during normal operation:
green LED beside the key will light up once in sequence to indicate
the recognition by the unity of the USB memory key;
bring the control to OFF to upload (to copy the configurations from the
USB key to the controller); to download (to copy the configurations
from the controller to the USB key), the controller can be in ON status;
press at the same time Prg and Set for 2 s and access the multifunction
menu: the message “HcP” will appear;
press “UP” until reaching the entry “USb”;
press “Set”;
choose whether you want to DOWNLOAD the parameters (= dnL), to
UPLOAD them (=uPd) or to exit the page (EXt);
press “Set”; the green LED will light up and will remain lit to indicate that
the upload / download of parameters occurred; if, for some reason, the
procedure should not be successful, the red LED will turn on;
extract the key. The LED turns off. The file is “.txt”type, and it can be
displayed on the computer.
Æ
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1. display the active loads and the main variables: temperature, humidity;
2. perform the control programming, facilitated by contextual help.
Æ
1
1
2
2
Æ
1
Note: the figure refers to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the
scrolling message "recipes in USB device” on the second row.
Fig. 2.u
2.13 Upload/downloadparameters(USBmemory
key)
Note: the download and upload operations, as well as the 10 lists
of parameters, also copy all the other parameters (one value only
for all 10 lists).
The USB memory key must be placed in the connector accessible after
removing the lower frame. Using the USB memory key you can:
1. download the parameters set (r01...r10): control saves inside the key the
10 parameters set;
2. upload the parameters set (r01...r10): control loads from the key the
10 parameters set);
1
2
2
USB key
Fig. 2.v
19
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
3. USER INTERFACE
The front panel contains the display and keyboard, made up from 10
or 11 keys (depending on the model), which, pressed individually or
together, allow to perform all of the controller programming operations.
The accessory UltraCella Service terminal, accessory terminal, allows the
commissioning of the control system via a guided procedure (Wizard)
and also programming the parameters with a contextual help that
explains the various functions.
3.1 Display
On the LED display is shown the temperature range from -50 °C (-58 °F)
to +150 °C (302 °F). The resolution of the tenth for temperatures in the
range -19,9…99,9. In case of alarm the value of the probe is displayed in
alternance with the codes of the active alarms. During programming, it
displays the codes that identify the parameters and their value.
Note: you can select the standard display by properly configuring
parameter /t1 (/t1 and /t2 for double digit models).
Front panel for single row display models Front panel for double row display models
cod. WB000S*
cod. WB000D*
UltraCella Service Terminal (accessories)
H
E
L
P
Multifunction menu
PRG
ESC
Fig. 3.a
Fig. 3.b
M
E
N
U
SET
HACCP
Fig. 3.c
Icons table on models with single row display P/Ns WB000S*
Icon
Function
Normal operation
ON
OFF
HACCP function enabled
-
HACCP alarm saved (HA and/or HF)
Door open
Door Close
Door open and door alarm active
Off
Waiting for activation
Off
Waiting for activation
Technical
support
HACCP
Door
Compressor On
Fan
Clock
On
Note
Flashing
Alarms, for example alarm due to EEprom Serious problem detected. Please contact
or probe fault
technical service
Blinks when the activation of the
compressor is delayed by safety times.
Blinks when the activation of the
compressor is delayed by safety times.
On if a scheduled defrost is
requested
Tab. 3.a
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
20
ENG
Icons table on models with two rows display P/Ns. WB000D*
Icon
Function
Normal operation
ON
OFF
HACCP function enabled
-
HACCP alarm saved (HA and/or HF)
Door open
Door Close
Door open and door alarm active
Off
Waiting for activation
Off
Waiting for activation
Technical
support
HACCP
Door
Compressor On
Fan
Clock
On
On if a scheduled defrost is
requested
Temperature visualization in
Celsius degrees
Temperature visualization in
Farenheit degrees
Celsius
degrees
Farenheit
degrees
humidity
Humidity visualization
percentage
Note
Flashing
Alarms, for example alarm due to EEprom Serious problem detected. Please contact
or probe fault
technical service
Blinks when the activation of the
compressor is delayed by safety times.
Blinks when the activation of the
compressor is delayed by safety times.
.
-
Tab. 3.b
3.2 Keyboard
Key
Normal operation
Pressing the individual key
• Pressed for 2 s, turns the control OFF
• Pressed for 2 s, turns the control ON
Blink
Combined pressure with other keys
On/Off
ALARM
• ESC function, return to higher level
• Pressed for 2 s, enters the programming menu
• In case of alarm: mutes the audible alarm (buzzer) and
deactivates the alarm relay
• Pressed for 2 s, reset the manual reset alarms
• Turns the light on/off
Prg + Set: if pressed at the same time for 2
s, allow access to the multifunction menu
Available only in case of alarm
• Turns auxiliary output 1 on/off (*)
Flashing for 5 seconds: attempt to activate
auxiliary output 1 from button, yet output
has different configuration
Flashing for 5 seconds: attempt to activate
auxiliary output 1 from button, yet output
has different configuration
Awaiting activation
• Turns auxiliary output 2 on/off (*)
• Activates/deactivates manual defrost
DEF
• Set point setting
• Value setting
• Value increase/ decrease (flashing)
/
UP/DOWN
Prg + Set: if pressed at the same time for 2 Indicates that the set point is not that
s, allow access to the multifunction menu the value set for parameter St but rather
defined by one of the following algorithms:
• Change set point from digital input (St+r4
and/or StH+r5)
• Change set point from time band (St+r4
and/or StH+r5)
• Set point ramps (variable set point)
Light on steady signals that AUX3 and/or
AUX4 outputs are active. See paragraph
6.20 for further information.
Tab. 3.c
(*) To activate outputs AUX1 / AUX2 by button, set H1/H5=2. If parameters
are not set, if AUX1/AUX2 key are pressed, they blink for 5 seconds
21
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
3.3 Programming
The parameters can be modified using the keyboard. Access to the
configuration parameters is protected by a password that prevents
unwanted modifications or access by unauthorised persons. With the
password you can access and change all the parameters of the control.
Æ
1
Note: in the LED display model the keys are illuminated according
to the menu where the user is operating, in order to facilitate
navigation.
3.3.1
Changing the set point
Category
Probes
Control
Compressor
Defrost
Alarms
Fan
Configuration
HACCP
1
1
2
Note: the figure refers to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the
scrolling message “Setpoint” on the second row
3.3.2
Modification of the parameters (for models
with single digit display cod. WB000S*)
Procedure:
1. to modify the parameters, first switch the controller OFF (press ON/
OFF button);
2. press Prg for 2 s: on the display appears the message “PAS” - password
request;
3. press UP/DOWN and insert the password: 22. If you press Set, the
code of the first parameters category will appear: Probes (see the
following table and parameters table);
4. press Set: the first parameter of the category will appear: /21;
5. press UP/DOWN until reaching the parameter to be modified;
6. press Set key to display the parameter value;
7. press UP/DOWN to reach the desired value;
8. press Set to confirm the new value and return to parameter code
display;
9. repeat the operations from 5) to 8) to change other parameters;
10. press Prg to return to higher level of the parameters categories and
UP/DOWN to pass to the next category: CtL. Repeat steps from 4) to
8) to access the category and change other parameters;
11. press one or more times Prg to exit the parameters modification
procedure and return to standard display visualization.
Æ
1
2
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
Category
Clock
Door and light
Recipes
Generic functions
EVD EVO
EVDice
Three-phase modules
Output configuration
Humidity management
Text
rtc
doL
rcP
GEF
EVO
ICE
3PH
OUT
HUM
Tab. 3.d
1
Modification of the parameters (for models
with double digit display cod. WB000D*)
Procedure:
1. to modify the parameters, first switch the controller OFF (press ON/
OFF button);
2. press Prg for 2 sec: the second row of the display will show “PASS”
(password required);
3. press UP/DOWN to enter the password: 22;
4. press Set; the second row of the display will scroll the name of the
first category of parameters: Probes (see the previous table and the
parameter table);
5. press Set: the second row of the display will scroll the code and
description of the first parameter in the category: /21 – Probe1
meas. stab.; the first row of the display will show the current value of
the parameter;
6. press Set: the value on the first row of the display flashes, to indicate
that the value can be modified;
7. press UP/DOWN until reaching the desired value;
8. press Set to confirm the new value; the value will stop flashing;
9. press UP/DOWN to scroll the other parameters;
10. repeat steps 6) to 9) to modify other parameters;
11. press Prg to return to the top level of parameter categories, or UP/
DOWN to move the next category: CtL (Control). Then repeat steps
from 5) to 9) to access the category and modify other parameters;
12. press Prg once or more than once to exit the parameter setting
procedure and return to the standard display.
Æ
2
Text
Pro
CtL
CMP
dEF
ALM
FAn
CnF
HcP
2
3.3.3
1
2
Note: if no key is pressed, after about 120 s the control
automatically returns to standard display..
Æ
2
1
Note: in the parameters or set point modification procedures, the
new value is saved every time the Set key is pressed.
In order to change the set point St (default =0°C):
1. the control system displays the standard display visualization;
2. press Set for 2 s: on the display appears the current value of the set
point;
3. press UP/DOWN to reach the desired value;
4. press Set to confirm the new set point value. The control returns to
standard display visualization.
1
2
2
22
ENG
Par. Description
tcE Enabling date modification procedure
0/1=No/Yes
tcT Date/ time change
Action on change 0Æ1 or 1Æ0
y__ Date/ time: year
M__ Date/ time: month
d__ Date/ time: day of the month
h__ Date/ time: hour
n__ Date/ time: minute
Def Min Max UoM
0
0
1
0
0
1
-
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
37
12
31
23
59
-
Æ
1
2
1
2
Note: the figure refers to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, as well
as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows with a
scrolling message, parametercode and description: “tce - enable data
modification”.
3.3.5
Example 2: set the scheduled defrosting
periods
Procedure:
1. access the parameters modification menu as described in the relative
paragraph;
2. enter category “rtc”;
3. press UP and select the parameters “ddi (i = 1…8”) to select the
frequency of the ith defrost, based on the indications in the table
below;
4. press UP and pass to the defrost hour and minute;
5. press once or more times Prg to save and return to standard
visualization.
0
1…7
8
9
10
11
Note: in the parameters or set point modification procedures, the
new value is saved every time the Set key is pressed.
ith defrosting disabled
Monday…Sunday
From Monday to Friday
From Monday to Saturday
Saturday and Sunday
Daily
Note: if no key is pressed, after about 120 s the control
automatically returns to standard display.
Æ
1
3.3.4
2
1
2
Example 1: current date/time setting
Note: the figure refers to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, as well
as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows with a
scrolling message, parameter code and description: “dd1 - defrost1-day”
Procedure:
1. access the parameters modification menu as described in the
relative paragraph;
2. enter category “rtc”;
3. select parameter “tcE” and set it to 1 to enable the date exchange;
4. press UP 2 times and then set the parameters regarding the year
(Y), month (M), day of the month (d), hour (h), minutes (n) (see table
below);
5. press UP, select tct parameter and set it from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 to
perform the data/ time change;
6. select again parameter tcE and set it to 0;
7. press one or more times Prg to save the date/ time and return to
standard display.
23
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
3.4 Procedures
3.4.1
Parameter set selection
Æ
The control can work with 10 sets of parameters, pre-set in the factory
by Carel, but modifiable to suit your requirements, indicated with r01 r10
(recipe 1 ... recipe 10);
In order to select the current parameters set (control in OFF):
1. from parameters modification menu, access the category “rcP” and
press Set; the message "bni" will appear; press Set again; the message
“r0i” will appear where "r0i" ranges from 1 to 10 and indicates the
currently active configuration on UltraCella;
2. press UP/DOWN to select the parameters set to be loaded; you can
choose between r01…r10; for example r02 (figure);
3. Press Set to confirm. The control system loads the chosen parameters
set;
4. Press once or more times Prg to return to standard display..
Param
Std
CAREL
/4
/t2
/A2
/A3
/A4
/A5
St
rd
StH
rdH
r1
r2
r3
c11
d0
dI
dt1
dP1
AL
AH
Ad
A5
A9
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
H1
H5
HO1
c12
d8d
tLi
A4
r01
0
6
1
0
0
0
0
2
90
5
-50
60
0
4
0
8
4
30
0
0
120
0
0
0
5
30
1
1
1
1
0
5
30
120
0
Red meat
Poultry
Fish
Vegetables
11
22
11
22
11
22
Æ
1
2
Note: the figure refers to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, as well
as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the
scrolling message “bni - recipe index now active” on the second row.
Configurations
Fruit
Summer and
Frozen
tropical fruit
Heater defrost
No defrost,
Heater defrost Heater defrost Timed defrost
Heater
Heater
with probe,
evap. fans
by stopping
with probe,
with probe,
defrost
defrost
evap. fans
on with
compressor,
evap. fans
evap. fans
with probe, with probe,
on with
compressor
evap. fans on
on with
evap. fans controlled by
evap. fans
compressor with compressor on, humidity compressor on
controlled by controlled by temperature
and off during
control
on and on
on and on
temperature temperature and off during
defrost
during defrost, during defrost,
defrost
and off
and off
humidity control
humidity
during
during
control
defrost
defrost
r02
r03
r04
r05
r06
r07
r08
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
4
11
4
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
-0,5
0
1
4
4
10
-22
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
90
90
90
95
95
85
90
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
-5
-5
-5
0
0
5
-25
10
10
10
10
10
15
-15
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
12
12
12
24
24
8
15
20
15
10
8
4
4
15
60
60
60
45
30
30
60
4
4
4
4
5
5
10
5
5
10
5
5
5
6
60
60
120
60
60
60
60
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
-8
0
0
5
5
5
5
30
30
30
15
15
10
30
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
15
15
15
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Restaurant Bakery
fresh food
Heater
Heater defrost
defrost
with probe,
with probe,
evap. fans
evap. fans
on with
compressor on controlled by
and on during temperature
and off
defrost
during
defrost
r09
r10
0
0
4
4
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
-20
2
2
90
90
5
5
0
-25
10
-10
0
0
4
4
0
0
13
15
10
15
90
60
4
10
5
6
60
60
0
0
0
0
0
1
5
-22
30
30
0
1
1
1
0
0
2
3
0
0
5
5
30
30
120
120
0
0
Tab. 3.e
For all other parameters not included in this table, the default values will be used for all configurations, as shown in chap.7 Parameter table.
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
24
ENG
3.4.2
DEACTIVATION MANUAL DEFROST
Press DEF: message “Off ” will appear and the control ends the defrost
Parameters set to default values
In order to set all parameters sets to the factory values (default):
1. from parameters modification menu, access the category “rcP”
and press Set; the message “r0i” will appear, where "i" indicates the
currently active configuration ;
2. press UP/DOWN and display the message “bnr”;
3. press Set: the message “no” will appear;
4. press UP/DOWN: the message “Std” will appear;
5. press set: the control system brings all parameters sets to default
values;
6. press one or more times Prg to return to standard display.
Æ
1
1
2
Note: The Figures refer to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
the message “Off ” appears on the second row of the display.
Note: in this manner all the modifications are erased and the
original factory values are restored to the default ones, indicated
in parameters table.
3.4.3
2
Defrost
In order to activate the defrost by temperature, the defrost probe must
detect a temperature lower than the temperature relative to defrost end
(par. dt1). The defrost by time is activated setting dI parameter to a value
>0.
3.4.4
Procedure:
1. press DEF. There can be 3 cases:
2. if the defrost probe detects a temperature greater than the value of
the defrost end temperature, the control displays the message “no”
and the defrost is not activated;
3. if there are protections in progress, the control waits before entering
the defrost. The DEF button blinks and when conditions permit, the
control enters the defrost;
4. control comes into defrost, it shows the message “On”. The DEF key
is lit and the defrost output is enabled. The display depends on
parameter d6.
ACTIVATION
Press keys AUX1/AUX2/Light: message “On” will appear and the control
activates the relative output.
Par. Description
d6
Terminal display during defrost
0 = Temperature alternated with dEF
1 = Last temperature shown before
defrost
2 = dEF
Def
1
Min
0
Max
2
AUX1/AUX2/Light
In order to activate/deactivate the digital outputs AUX1/AUX2 (auxiliary
mode outputs) from keyboard set the parameters H1/H5=2. The light
output is fixed and cannot be configured.
Æ
1
UoM
-
Æ
ACTIVATION MANUAL DEFROST
3.4.5
1
2
2
2
Æ
1
2
1
2
Note: The Figures refer to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
the message “On” and “Off ” appear on the second row of the display.
2
2
1
Note: if output AUX1/2 was not enabled by setting H1/H5 = 2, the
relative key blinks to signal that the output is not active. However,
the messages “On” and “Off ” will appear
Request a manual defrost
1
2
DEACTIVATION
Press keys AUX1/AUX2/Light: message “Off ” will appear and the control
deactivates the relative output.
1
1
Æ
1
2
1
On/Off
In order to turn off the control from keyboard:
• press On/Off for 2 s.
2
The display will alternate Off to the standard display.
The key On/Off lights up and any active output relay will be deactivated.
1
2
Case 1
1
2
Case 2
1
2
Case 3
Æ
Note: The Figures refer to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
the message “no” and “On” appear on the second row of the display.
1
2
1
2
Note: The Figures refer to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
the message “On” and “Off ” appear on the second row of the display.
25
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
In order to turn on the control from keyboard:
• press On/Off for 2 s.
Par.
HA
HA1
HA2
Han
HF
HF1
HF2
HFn
Hcr
“On” will appear on the display and then control returns to the standard
display. The output relay will be re-activated.
Æ
1
2
1
2
Description
Date/time of last HA alarm
Date/time of penultimate HA alarm
Date/time of third from last HA alarm
Number of HA alarms
Date/time of last HF alarm
Date/time of penultimate HF alarm
Date/time of third from last HF alarm
Number of HF alarms
HACCP alarms cancelling
Action on variation 0Æ1 or 1Æ0
Def Min Max UoM
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
1
-
Each alarm is displayed with scrolling text, which contains the day of
week, hour, minute, and the temperature that caused the alarm. This is
a list (FIFO) in which are stored only the last 3 alarms. Instead, the alarm
counters (HAn, HFn), after reaching 15, they stop.
Note: The Figures refer to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
the message “On” and “Off ” appear on the second row of the display.
Example: HA alarm triggered Thursday at 13:17, with detected
temperature of 36.8 °C.
3.5 Multifunction menu
Æ
The multifunction menu allows you to access:
• “HcP”: HACCP alarms display, type HA and HF alarms and reset;
• “cc”: continuous cycle activation/deactivation;
• “rEc”: display maximum and minimum temperature, cancellation and
re-start recording;
• “I/O”, input/output: displaying the temperature read by the probe and
digital input status;
• “USB”: USB key;
• “InF”: information
• “Log”: datalogging function
• "SOF" UltraCella software update
1
2
Æ
2
1
2
1
2
Æ
1
Procedure:
1. press Prg and Set for 2 s; the first menu will appear: HcP;
2. press UP/DOWN to view other entries;
3. press Set to enter: follow the steps described in the following sections
for the relative explanations;
4. Press one or more times Prg to return to standard display.
1
2
Æ
Æ
1
2
ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
Note: the figure refers to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the
scrolling message “HACCP Alarms” on the second row.
Æ
1
2
1
2
Note: the figure refers to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the
scrolling message “Menu” on the second row.
3.5.1
3.5.2
HACCP alarms display
For explanations regarding HACCP alarms, consult chapter “Alarms”.
In the multifunction menu you can see the date and time of the last 3
alarms HA and HF. After entering the multifunction menu (see previous
par.), select with UP / DOWN the message “HcP”.
Par. Description
cc Continuous cycle duration
Def
0
Min
0
Max
15
UoM
hour
After entering the multifunction menu (see previous par.), select with UP
/ DOWN the message “cc”.
Procedure:
1. press Set, and then UP / DOWN to display the parameters in the
following table: you can see the number of alarms, the relative date
and you can also cancel the alarms;
2. press Set to display the alarm date and time;
3. press Prg until you return to standard display.
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
Continuous cycle
For explanation of continuous cycle, see chapter 6.
In order to activate the continuous cycle
• the control must be on;
• the value of the parameter cc must be >0.
ACTIVATION
Procedure:
1. press Set; the message “OFF” will appear (continuous cycle disabled);
2. press UP/DOWN: the message “ON” appears;
3. after about 1 s the control returns to standard display and the
compressor icon appears, to show the activation of the function.
26
ENG
Æ
1
2
Ç
1
Æ
2
1
2
1
2
ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
Note: by pressing UP you will cancel both the maximum and the
minimum recorded temperature.
Æ
1
2
1
Note: the Figures refer to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*:
• MAX --> Max temp recorder (scrolling)
• 36,9 --> Max
• 13.Y --> year
• 11.M --> month
• 22.d --> day
• 9.H --> hour
• 34.m --> minute
2
Note: the figure refers to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the
scrolling message “Continuous cycle” on the second row.
DEACTIVATION
Follow the same activation steps and set “OFF”.
3.5.4
Note: the activation of the continuous cycle function does not
appear on display in standard mode.
3.5.3
Input/output status display
After entering the multifunction menu (see previous par.), select with UP
/ DOWN the message “I/O”.
Procedure:
1. Press Set: the message “b1” appears regarding the probe B1;
2. Press Set once again: the value read on probe B1 will appear
alternating with the message b1;
3. Press Prg to return to upper level;
4. Press UP/DOWN and repeat steps 1)…3) to display the inputs/
outputs indicated in table;
5. Press one or more times Prg to return to standard display
Maximum and minimum temperature
monitoring
The control allows you to continuously record the minimum and
maximum temperature measured by the control probe. The monitoring
is always active. The values can be reset, as described below.
After entering the multifunction menu (see previous par.), select with UP
/ DOWN the message “rEc”.
Procedure:
1. press Set; the message “MAX” will appear (maximum registered
temperature); in order to see the maximum temperature, registration
date and time pass to point 3 or:
2. press UP/DOWN: the message “MIn” appears (minimum temperature
registered);
3. press Set: the maximum/minimum recorded temperature will appear
along with the date/time of record (y=year, m = month, d = day, h =
hour, m = minutes. Press UP to cancel (both temperatures), appears
RES and the control exits the menu, or press Prg for more than once
and exit the display.
Text
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
di1
di2
di3
do1
do2
Description
Analogue input 1
Analogue input 2
Analogue input 3
Analogue input 4
Analogue input 5
Digital input 1
Digital input 2
Digital input 3
Digital output 1
Digital output 2
do3
do4
do5
Digital output 3
Digital output 4
Digital output 5
Example: maximum registered temperature 36.9°C on 22/11/2013 at 9.34.
Text
do6
Y1
ESu
ESA
ESH
ISu
ISa
ISH
U1
U2
Description
Digital output 6
Analog output 1
EVD EVO suction temp.
EVD EVO evap. temp.
EVD EVO superheat
EVD ICE suction temperature
EVD ICE evaporation temperature
EVD ICE superheat
Defrost probe Sd1 (3PH model)
Auxiliary defrost probe Sd2 (3PH
model)
U3 Condenser probe Sc (3PH model)
dU4 Motor protector (3PH model)
dU5 High/low pressure switch or Kriwan
alarm (3PH model)
Tab. 3.f
Note: the opened digital inputs/outputs are displayed along with
the message “oP” (=open), those closed with “cLo” (=closed).
Æ
1
2
Example 1: probe B1 measures the temperature of -1.0 °C..
1
2
Æ
1
Æ
Ç
1
2
2
Æ
1
2
1
2
Æ
1
Ç
2
Ç
1
2
Æ
1
2
1
Note: the figure refers to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the
2
27
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
scrolling message “Probe1 status” on the second row “.
Example 2: digital input 1 is closed.
Æ
Æ
1
Æ
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
Note: the figure refers to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the
scrolling message “Digital input 1 status” on the second row.
Note: the figures refer to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the
scrolling message “recipes in USB device” on the second row
Parameters upload/download
Note: the download and upload operations, as well as the 10 lists
of parameters, also copy all the other parameters (one value only
for all 10 lists).
Preliminary operations:
1. remove the lower frame and insert the USB memory key;
2. set the control to OFF.
Download saved alarms
3.5.5
USB memory key
1
Starting from software release 1.5, the last 64 alarms activated and saved
on UltraCella can be downloaded to a USB flash drive, in order from the
most recent to the oldest, in csv format. When the 64th alarm is saved, the
next one will overwrite the oldest.
Alarms that have been saved and are no longer active can only be
displayed on the UltraCella Service terminal, but can be downloaded
both from the terminal and the LED interface.
2
•
Alarm log file name: AlarmLog.csv
1. remove the bottom frame and plug in the USB flash drive. The red
USB key
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fig. 3.d
After entering the multifunction menu (see previous par.), select with UP
/ DOWN the message “USb”.
and green LEDs on the side of the key will come on individually in
sequence to indicate that the unit recognises the USB flash drive;
press Prg and Set for 2 sec; the first menu is displayed: “HcP”;
press UP 4 times until reaching the “USB” menu item;
press Set; the first submenu is shown: “rcP”;
press UP to access the “ALG” submenu;.
Procedure:
Press Set: the following commands will appear by scrolling UP/DOWN:
• rcP: press Set to confirm;
• EXt: press Set to exit;
• dnL: press Set, the control saves inside the key the 10 parameters set:
r01…r10;
• uPd: press Set, the control loads from the key the 10 parameters set:
r01…r10;
1
2
6. press SET to confirm the download of the saved alarms. The message
“ALG” will flash during the download procedure; at the end, “ALG” will
stop flashing and the green LED next to the USB port will come on,
indicating the end of the procedure; if for some reason the procedure
Note
• the parameters are saved in a text file type. txt, which can be viewed
on the computer;
is not successful, the alarm icon
• for information regarding the switching of the LEDs, see chapter 2.10.
will be shown on the display;
7. unplug the key; to exit the “ALG” menu, press PRG twice.
Note: If for some reason the procedure is not successful, when
Æ
1
1
2
exiting the menu, as well as the alarm icon
on the display, the
error message “ALM” will be displayed. The error message will be cleared
the next time the alarms are downloaded successfully or when restarting
the controller.
2
Example: alarms saved starting 2 April 2014 at 10:30:00. The alarm log was
downloaded to the USB flash drive at 16:22:45 on the same day.
Start -> alarm activated
Stop -> alarm reset
Æ
1
2
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
1
TIME
ID NAME
EVENT VAR1 VAR2
2014-04-02 T10:30:00+00:00 11 ALARM_Ed1.Active Start
2014-04-02 T16:22:45+00:00 11 ALARM_Ed1.Active Stop
2
28
ENG
3.5.6
Information
In the information menu you can view the software release.
After entering the multifunction menu (see chapter 3.4), select with UP /
DOWN the message “InF”.
Æ
1
USB key
Æ
2
1
2
1
Fig. 3.f
2
Fig. 3.e
Procedure:
1. press Set: the message “vEr” appears regarding the software revision;
2. press Set once again: the software revision will appear (e.g. 1.7);
3. press one or more times Prg to return to standard display .
To activate the data logging function, the probe/probes to be recorded
must be configured (up to max 2) through the parameters tr1 and tr2.
The sample time (for both the variables) is selectable between 2 and 60
minuts (default 5).
Par.
Note: the figure refers to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the
scrolling message “Application version” on the second row
3.5.7
tr1
Data logging function
UltraCella introduces the data logging function to cold room control,
offering the possibility to record the temperature or the humidity read
by two probes.
tr2
How to download the file with variables recorded by UltraCella:
1. remove the bottom frame and insert the USB flash drive. The red and
green LEDs next to the flash drive will come on once in sequence to
indicate the that unit has recognised the USB flash drive;
2. press Prg and Set for 2 s; the first menu will be displayed: “HcP”
3. press UP or DOWN until reaching the “LoG” menu item;
4. press SET to confirm the download of the recorded variables (log file) to
the USB flash drive. The message “LoG” will flash during downloading;
at the end, “LoG” will stop flashing to indicate that the download has
been completed; if the procedure fails for some reason, the alarm icon
trc
will be shown on the display;
5. remove the flash drive; to exit the “LoG” menu, press PRG and/or SET.
Description
First temperature to be
recorded selection
0 = no log
1 = Sv
2 = Sm (sonda letta da B1)
3 = Sr
4 = Sd1
5 = Sd2
6 = Sc
7 = SA
8 = Su (humidity probe)
Second temperature to be
recorded selection
0 = no log
1 = Sv
2 = Sm (sonda letta da B1)
3 = Sr
4 = Sd1
5 = Sd2
6 = Sc
7 = SA
8 = Su (humidity probe)
Sample time temperature
recording
Def
0
Min
0
Max
8
UoM
-
0
0
8
-
5
2
60
min
• Channels recorded: two probes selected through tr1 and tr2
parameters
• Start logging: as soon as parameter tr1/tr2 is set to a value >0. The
1
instant the setting is confirmed is recorded in the log under event
name “Start”
• Sample time: trc (minutes) for both the variables
• Data logging duration: depends on the sampling time trc and the
maximum number of samples Nrec that UltraCella can record (209000),
based on the following formula:
2
Note: the figure refers to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the
scrolling message “recorder” on the second row.
Data logging duration = Nrec * trc
Sampling time (trc)
2 min
5 min
10 min
30 min
60 min
Note: if the procedure fails for some reason, when exiting the
menu, as well as the alarm icon
the error message “LoG” will
also be shown on the display.
The message error will be cleared after the next correct download or
when restarting the controller.
Data logging duration
290 days
726 days (around 2 years)
1451 days (around 4 years)
4353 days (around 8 years)
8708 days (around 24 years)
• Data extraction: any USB flash drive available on the market can be
used
• Extracted log file names: Log_UltraCella_1.csv for the first variable
selected through the parameter tr1, Log_UltraCella_2.csv for the
second variable selected through the parameter tr2
• Other events: as well as the “Start” event, the log also records “Stop”
events (tr1=0 or tr2=0) and “Boot” (starting or restarting the controller)
• Log data format: the data is organised in columns: date (in standard
ISO 8601 format) , type of event, value of the variable specify as Src1
(first variable) and Src2 (second variable)
When the probes to be recorded are suitably configured through the
parameters tr1 and tr2 and the sample time through the parameter trc,
the unit starts recording the variables every trc minutes (sample time) for
a maximum period of 2 years each. After the second year, the controller
overwrites the oldest data saved.
The variables log is available as a csv file via USB flash drive, which can be
analysed in Excel or other widely-available programs.
29
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
Example: recording temperature probe Sv started on 2 April 2014 at
17:19:49. The data were extracted by USB flash drive at 18:10 on the same
day.
TIME
2014-04-02T17:19:49+00:00
2014-04-02T17:24:49+00:00
2014-04-02T17:29:49+00:00
2014-04-02T17:34:49+00:00
2014-04-02T17:39:49+00:00
2014-04-02T17:44:49+00:00
2014-04-02T17:49:49+00:00
2014-04-02T17:54:49+00:00
2014-04-02T17:59:49+00:00
2014-04-02T18:04:49+00:00
2014-04-02T18:09:49+00:00
EVENT
Boot
3.6 Message language selection
The only messages that change according to the selected language are
those shown on the UltraCella Service terminal screens (PGDEWB0FZ*).
Sv_Probe
0
25,2
25,0
24,6
24,1
21,9
18,8
15,1
12,7
10,1
7,3
Tab. 3.g
3.5.8
Selecting the language
UltraCella software update from LED display
interface
1. On the UltraCella Service terminal, access the multifunction menu by
pressing the UP button;
Starting from software release 1.5, the UltraCella software can also be
updated from the LED interface, as well as from the UltraCella Service
terminal.
2. The HACCP icon is displayed. Press UP or DOWN until reaching the “i”
icon (information);
3. Press SET to access the language setting;
4. Select the desired language (in software release 1.6, the languages
The upgrade.ap1 file needed to perform the update from the UltraCella
LED interface must only be supplied by CAREL personnel.
available are Italian, English, German, French and Spanish) by
pressing UP or DOWN. Press SET to confirm. The change is effective
immediately;
5. Press ESC twice to exit the language selection menu and return to
the main screen
1. Create an “upgrade” folder in the main directory on the USB flash
drive. Copy the upgrade.ap1 file to the new folder;
2. remove the bottom frame and plug in the USB flash drive. The red
and green LEDs on the side of the key will come on individually in
sequence to indicate that the unit recognises the USB flash drive;
3. press Prg and Set for 2 sec; the first menu is displayed: “HcP”;
4. press UP or DOWN until reaching the “SOF” menu item;
5. press SET to confirm the software update. The message “SOF” will
flash during the update; at the end, “SOF” will stop flashing, indicating
the end of the procedure; if for some reason the procedure is not
will be shown on the display;
successful, the alarm icon
6. unplug the key; to exit the “SOF” menu, press PRG and/or SET
1
2
Note: The figure refers to navigation on models with single-row
display, WB000S%. On models with double row display, WB000D%, as well
as the message described above, during the update the message
“Software update” also scrolls on the second row.
Note: If for some reason the procedure is not successful, when
exiting the menu, as well as the alarm icon
on the display, the error
message “SOF” will be displayed. In this case UltraCella retains the
previously installed software. The error message will be cleared the next
time the software is updated successfully or when restarting the
controller.
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
30
ENG
4. COMMISSIONING
4.1 First commissioning
4.3 Single digit display models cod.
WB000S* commissioning
After wiring the electrical connections and the power supply (see
installation chapter), the operations required for commissioning the
UltraCella control system depend on the type of interface used. Refer to
some parameters such as:
1. Set-point and differential;
2. Probes and digital inputs configuration;
3. Selection of the type of defrost and fans operation;
4. Cold room light management.
UltraCella with single row display
Types of interfaces:
• board with LED display: parameters configuration is performed using
the display and the keyboard based on the procedure described in
chap.3 “parameters change”. Alternatively, you can connect the remote
graphic terminal “UltraCella Sevice Terminal” and enter the wizard
menu for first commissioning (wizard);
• USB memory key: put the control on OFF and load the programming
parameters from USB memory key (uPd command, UPLOAD, see
Chapter 3);
• supervisor: in order to facilitate the launch of a large number of controls
UltraCella using only the supervisor you can limit the operation of the
first commissioning to the serial address setting. The configuration is
postponed to a later time using the supervisor.
Fig. 4.a
After the configuration you can enable the control of the cold room by
pressing the ON/OFF key.
1
2
1
2
1
2
1. First switch the controller OFF (press ON/OFF).
4.2 Parameters to be set for the
commissioning
Par
St
rd
/P
/A2
/A3
/P4
/A4
/P5
/A5
A5
A9
d0
dt1
Description
Categ.
Set point
CtL
Differential
CtL
Type B1 to B3
Pro
B2 configuration
Pro
B3 configuration
Pro
Type B4
Pro
B4 configuration
Pro
Type B5
Pro
B5 configuration
Pro
Digital input configuration 2 (DI2) ALM
Digital input configuration 3 (DI3) ALM
Type of defrost
dEF
End defrost temperature, main
dEF
evaporator
dP1 Maximum defrost duration
dEF
dd Dripping time after defrost (fans
dEF
off )
Fd Post dripping time (fans off )
Fan
F3 Evaporator fan during defrost
Fan
0/1=on/off
c12 Compressor safety for door switch doL
0 = disable door management
d8d Compressor restart time for door
doL
switch
A3 Disable door microswitch
doL
0=enabled
1=disabled
tLi Light on with door open
doL
A4 Light management
doL
0 = door switch + light key
1 = light key
c1 Minimum time between
CmP
compressor starts
c2 Minimum compressor off time
CmP
c3 Minimum compressor on time
CmP
Def Min Max
0
r1
r2
2.0 0.1 20
0
0
2
1
0
3
0
0
5
0
0
2
0
0
4
0
0
1
0
0
5
0
0
15
0
0
15
0
0
3
4.0 -50.0 200.0
UoM
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F
30
2
1
0
250
30
min
min
1
1
0
0
30
1
min
-
5
0
5
min
30
c12
240
min
1
0
1
-
120
0
0
0
240
1
min
-
6
0
30
min
3
3
0
0
15
15
min
min
Tab. 4.a
1
2
2. Press Prg for 2 sec: the password
prompt is displayed (PAS).
1
2
4. Press Set: the first category is
displayed: Pro (Probes).
1
2
6. Press repeatedly UP to reach
the parameter /P.
1
2
8. Press UP to modify the value.
31
3. Press UP and enter the
password: 22.
1
2
5. Press Set: the first parameter is
displayed: /21.
1
2
7. Press Set to set the value of the
parameter (see settings in the
parameter table).
1
2
9. Press Set to confirm and return
to the parameter code. The new
value has now been saved on the
controller.
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
1
1
2
10. Press UP to move to
parameters /A2.../ A5; make any
required settings.
1
2
5. Press Set: the second row of the
display will scroll the code and
description of the first parameter
in the category: /21 – Probe1
meas. stab.; the first row of the
display will show the current
value of the parameter
6. Press UP repeatedly until
reaching parameter /P. The second
row of the display will scroll the
code and description of the
parameter: /P – type B1 to B3; the
first row of the display will show
the current value of the parameter
7. Press Set and UP/DOWN to
set the desired value of the
parameter.
8. Press Set to confirm. The new
value entered is now saved on the
controller.
9. Press UP to move to parameters
/A2…/A5; make any required
settings .
10. Press Prg to return to the
categories of parameters.
11. Press Prg to return to the
parameter categories.
2
12. Press UP to move to category CtL and follow the previous steps to set St
and the following parameters.
4.4 Double digit display models cod.
WB000D* commissioning
UltraCella with double row display
11. Press UP to move to category CtL (the second row scrolls the name of
the second category of parameters: Control) and follow the previous steps
to set St and the subsequent parameters, as shown in the previous table
and in the parameter table.
Fig. 4.b
4.5 Commissioning with UltraCella Service
Terminal
1. First switch the controller OFF (press ON/OFF).
2. Press Prg for 2 sec: the second row of the display will show “PASS”
(password required).
+
UltraCella
with LED display
3. Press UP/DOWN to enter the
password: 22.
Multifunction menu
ESC
M
E
N
U
SET
HACCP
UltraCella Service terminal
Fig. 4.c
4. Press Set; the second row of the
display will scroll the name of the
first category of parameters: Probes.
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
H
E
L
P
PRG
If the UltraCella controller has never been configured, as soon as the
terminal is connected, the wizard is shown automatically. The Wizard
menu can also be accessed to repeat the guided commissioning
procedure before the first commissioning.
32
ENG
3. Press DOWN until reaching the “Wizard” menu
H
E
L
P
1
2
Parameters Categ. 16/16
M
E
N
U
14-EVDice
15-Three-phases
16-Wizard
PRG
SET
ESC
Fig. 4.i
Fig. 4.d
4. Confirm by selecting Set.
Remove the bottom faceplate and connect the UltraCella Service
Terminal to the controller.
H
E
L
P
PRG
4.5.1
First start - up
Language: English
Up/Down: Choose language
Prg/Set: 1st question
PRG
5. Press Up and SET to enter the guided commissioning procedure.
SET
4.6 Main function commissioning
ESC
4.6.1
Fig. 4.e
4.5.2
Repeated commissioning procedure
03/12/13
17:52:30
Setpoint
0.0 °C
Set-point and differential
The reference output is the compressor output (CMP). The set point
and differential determine the compressor activation and deactivation
temperatures. The control probe is the virtual probe Sv. At start-up it
corresponds to probe B1. If the temperature inside the cold room is not
uniform the control can be set (by placing /4> 0) to regulate on a “virtual”
probe obtained from the average of two measurement points (probes
B1 and B2).
The commissioning procedure can be repeated by accessing the Wizard
menu.
H
E
L
P
SET
Fig. 4.j
M
E
N
U
Wizard
M
E
N
U
YES
ESC
When starting for the first time, once the Service Tool is connected, the
wizard is shown automatically. Select the desired language and then
answer the questions to set the other parameters.
H
E
L
P
Wizard
Do you want to use the
Wizard to configure
the cold room ?
CMP
ON
M
E
N
U
OFF
PRG
SET
rd
OFF
Sv
St
ESC
Fig. 4.k
Key
Fig. 4.f
St
Sv
rd
CMP
1.Switch the controller OFF (press DOWN and select the On/Off icon;
press Set twice and then UP to switch the controller OFF; press Esc twice
to exit)
H
E
L
P
Parameters Modification
Note: see par. "6.3 Set point" for the options related to the
regulation of the control set point
M
E
N
U
Password: 1234
PRG
4.6.2
SET
Analogue Inputs
B1
B2
B3
B4
Fig. 4.g
2. To enter programming mode: Press Prg and enter the password: 1234
PRG
Parameters Categ. 1/16
1-Probes
2-Control
3-Compressor
Probes configuration
The UltraCella controls have a maximum of 5 analog inputs, of which
3 can be configured as temperature probes (NTC probes, NTC high
temperature probes, PT1000), the fourth as temperature probe or input 0
... 10 V, the fifth can be configured as input 4 ... 20 mA or 0...5 Vrat.
ESC
H
E
L
P
Set point
Virtual probe
Differential
Compressor
M
E
N
U
B5
SET
ESC
Type
NTC10 kΩ a 25°C, range -50T90°C,
NTC extended range, NTC50 kΩ a 25°C, range 0T150°C;
PT1000, 1000 Ω a 0°C, range -50T90°C
NTC10 kΩ a 25°C, range -50T90°C,
NTC extended range, NTC50 kΩ a 25°C, range 0T150°C
0…10 V
4…20 mA
0...5Vrat
0.5...4.5Vrat
Tab. 4.b
Fig. 4.h
33
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
Below the parameters with the selection:
Par.
/P
Description
Type B1 to B3
0 = NTC Standard Range -50T90°C
1 = NTC Enhanced Range 0T150°C
2 = PT1000
Type B4
0 = NTC Standard Range -50T90°C
1 = NTC Enhanced Range 0T150°C
2 = 0 to 10 V
Type B5
0 = 4 to 20 mA
1 = 0 to 5 Vrat
2= 0.5...4.5Vrat
/P4
/P5
4.6.4
Def
0
Min
0
Max
2
UoM
-
0
0
2
-
0
0
1
-
Probes reading correction
The values read by the probes can be corrected by adding/removing an
offset from the measure with the parameters /c1, ..., /c5.
Par.
/c1
/c2
/c3
/c4
/c5
Description
Offset B1
Offset B2
Offset B3
Offset B4
Offset B5
Def
0
0
0
0
0
Min Max
UoM
-20.0 20.0
°C/°F
-20.0 20.0
°C/°F
-20.0 20.0
°C/°F
-20.0 20.0
°C/°F/%rH
-20.0 20.0 °C/°F/%rH/bar/psi
The offset may need to comply with HACCP requirements. In this case,
the offset should be calculated using a calibrated instrument. Setting
these parameters affects the measurement and the value shown on the
display, and consequently may not be allowed. If in doubt, contact the
food safety manager or site manager.
T2
4.6.3
Probes function assignment B1, B2, B3, B4, B5
A
The control, inside the cold room, can use the probes:
• outlet;
• intake;
• defrost, placed in the evaporator, preferably where the ice resides most;
• condenser, used to protect the compressor due to high discharge
temperature, associated with fowling of the condenser or fan failure.
T1
min
Probe B1 is configured as environment probe and its function cannot be
changed.
Par.
/A2
/A3
/A4
/A5
Description
Configuration B2
0 Absent
1 Defrost probe 1 (Sd1)
2 Intake probe (Sr)
3 Generic temperature probe 2
Configuration B3
0 Absent
1 Defrost probe 2 (Sd2)
2 Cond. probe (Sc)
3 Defrost probe 1 (Sd1)
4 Ambient probe (SA)
5 Generic temperature probe 3
Configuration B4
0 Absent
1 Ambient temperature probe (SA)
2 Humidity probe
3 Generic temperature probe 4
4 Generic humidity probe 4
Configuration B5
0 Absent
1 Humidity probe
2 Generic temperature probe 5
3 Generic humidity probe 5
4 Generic pressure probe 5
5 Condensing pressure probe (Scp)
Def
1
Min
0
Max
3
UoM
-
0
0
5
-
0
0
4
-
Key
T1
T2
A
min, max
0
5
For probe B4, if configured as a 0 to 10 V input (/P4=2) and for probe B5,
the logical control values corresponding to the physical end scale values
can be configured.
Par.
/4H
/5L
/5H
Description
Disable door microswitch
0= enabled
1= disabled
Def
1
Min
0
Max
1
UoM
-
If A3=0 and the door microswitch is not connected, the controller will
activate the "door open" icon. To prevent incorrect messages being
displayed, set A3=1 or short-circuit pin 21 (DI1) to one of the GND pins.
Description
Def Min Max UoM
Probe 4 minimum value (only for 0...10V
0
-50,0 /4H
input)
Probe 4 maximum value (only for 0...10V 100,0 /4L 200,0
input)
Probe 5 minimum value
0,0 -50,0 /5H
Probe 5 maximum value
100,0 /5L 999
-
You can link multiple contacts to multifunction digital inputs to activate
various functions, such as alarm, enable / start defrost, low pressure, etc..
Caution: in order to ensure the safety of the unit in the event of
serious alarms, all the electromechanical safety devices required
to guarantee correct operation must be fitted on the unit.
Example: if input B5 is connected to a pressure sensor with 4 to 20 mA
output and a range of -1 to 9.3 bars, set
- /5L = -1.0
- /5H = 9.3
In this case, when the probe reads a value of 12 mA, the value associated
with the reading of B5 will be 4.1 (middle of the scale).
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
Digital inputs
Note: the digital input 1(DI1) is used by default for the door
switch, however this be can be configured as DI2 and DI3
If the door switch is not used (for example, not connected to DI1), it can
be disabled by setting A3=1 and A11=5 (default value) or associating DI1
with another function, see Table 4b.
-
Par.
A3
/4L
Temperature measured by the probe
Temperature measured by the probe after offset correction
Offset value
Measurement range
HACCP - CAUTION
The modification of these parameters, influencing the measurement and
display, may not be allowed in some applications or might require special
approval because it may affect the operation of HACCP systems.
If in doubt, consult the person in charge of food safety or the manager
of the plant.
4.6.5
0
max
Fig. 4.l
34
ENG
Functions of digital inputs DI1, DI2 and DI3
4 = Start defrost from external contact
Application: this feature is useful in case you need to perform synchronized
defrost across multiple units or otherwise manually controlled by an
external contact. To perform the defrosts, connect a cyclical, mechanical
or electronic timer to the digital input. You can connect multiple units
at the same timer and set different values for the parameter d5 (defrost
delay from multifunction input) to avoid simultaneous defrosts.
PARAMETERS A11, A5, A9
Selection
Contacts
0 = Not active
1 = Immediate external alarm
2 = Do not select
3 = Enable defrost
4 = Start defrost
5 = Door switch
6= Remote On/Off
7 = Change set point (r4-r5) from sw..
8 = Low pressure switch
9 = Do not select
10 = Do not select
11 = Do not select
12 = AUX activation
13 = Do not select
14 = Continuous cycle activation
15 = Alarm from generic function
(DI2 and DI3 only)
16 = Start/stop defrost
17 = Serious alarm
OPEN
CLOSE
active
not enabled
not active
active
OFF
inactive
low pressure
status
deactivated
contact opening
(deactivation)
active/inactive
not active
enabled
active
inactive
ON
active
normal status
stop
active
ON
Timer
OFF
ON
OFF
activated
contact closing
(activation)
active/inactive
ON
UNIT 2
Defrost
OFF
UNIT 3
ON
Defrost
OFF
start
inactive
Tab. 4.c
dP(1)
dP(2)
dP(3)
t
d5(2)
Below are indicated the parameters used to explain the selections for A5
and A9.
d5(3)
Fig. 4.m
1 = Immediate external alarm
Key
dP
UNIT 1…3
d5
t
Application: external alarm that requires immediate activation (for
example, high pressure alarm or compressor thermal overload). The
activation of the alarm:
1. • shows the message on the display (IA);
• activates the buzzer, if enabled;
• activates the alarm relay, if selected;
2. involves the following actions on the actuators:
• compressor: operates depending on the values assigned to
parameter A6 (stop compressor on external alarm).
• fans: continue to operate according to the fan parameters (F).
Maximum defrost duration
Unit 1…3
Defrost delay from digital input
Time
5 = door switch (see parameter A3)
6=On/Off remote
The digital input can also be programmed as a remote ON/OFF switch.
When the control is set to OFF:
• the temperature is displayed alternately with the message “OFF”, the
internal timer relative to the parameter dI is updated. If dI expires when
the unit is OFF, a defrost is performed when the unit is switched on
again;
• the auxiliary relays remain active set as an auxiliary output and light,
the other auxiliary outputs are off ;
• the buzzer and the alarm relay are off;
• the control does not perform the control functions, defrosts, continuous
cycle, temperature alarm signalling and all the other functions;
• the compressor protection times are respected.
Note:
• when stopping the compressor, the minimum ON time (c3) is ignored.
• if more than 1 input is configured on immediate alarm, the alarm is
generated when one of the inputs is opened.
2 = Do not select
3 = Enable defrost
Application: Any defrost request arriving when the contact is open will
remain pending until the contact closes.
At control restart, all functions are reactivated, except:
• defrost at start-up;
• compressor and fan delay at start-up.
A11/A5/A9 = 3
Contacts
Open
Closed
Close with active
defrost
UNIT 1
Defrost
Defrost
Not enabled
Enabled (defrost start is still determined by the control)
when the digital input is opened, the defrost is
immediately stopped and the unit restarts normal
operation (without performing the dripping or postdripping phases). The LED starts flashing to indicate
that the defrost request is pending, waiting for the next
enabling signal (closing of the contact), when the defrost
will be performed completely.
Tab. 4.d
Note: The ON/OFF from external digital input has priority over the
keypad and the supervisor.
7 = Change set point (r4-r5) from switch
The temperature and/or humidity set point can be changed by digital
input, adding a temperature (r4) and/or humidity (r5) offfset:
Digital input open
Current set point (temperature) = St
Current set point (humidity) = StH
Note: this function is useful to prevent defrosts on the units
accessible by the public during opening times.
35
Digital input closed
Current set point (temperature) =
St + r4
Current set point (humidity) = StH
+ r5
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
When the digital input (e.g. DI2 A5=7) is closed, the current set point (e.g.
temperature) changes from St to St+r4 and the SET button on the display
(or “Set point” on the pGD) starts flashing. When the same digital input is
open, the set point returns to the initial value and the SET button stops
flashing.
The following actions occur on the actuators:
• immediate deactivation of all the outputs (relays), except for those
configured as lights and/or alarms.
Note:
• when shutting down the compressor, the minimum compressor
on time (c3) and the running time relating to parameter A6 (stop
compressor from external alarm) are ignored.
• if more than one digital input is configured as a serious alarm, the
alarm is generated when just one of the inputs is open.
8 = Low pressure switch
By setting A5/A9=8 you can manage the low pressure switch. The low
pressure alarm “LP” is signalled when the low pressure switch is triggered:
• during normal regulation, with active compressor and pump down
function is disabled (c7=0)
• with pump-down function enabled (c7 >0), if the pump down valve is
opened and the compressor is active.
4.6.6
The low pressure alarm signal is delayed by the time set for parameter A7.
The low pressure alarm ‘LP’ stops the compressor.
Æ
Å
1
2
Type of defrost
UltraCella allows you to manage the following types of defrost, depending
on parameter d0:
0. electric heater defrost by temperature;
1. hot gas defrost by temperature;
2. electric heater defrost by time;
3 hot gas defrost by time.
For further explanations please see chap. 6.
1
Par. Description
d0 Type of defrost
0
heater by temperature.
1
hot gas by temperature
2
heater by time
3
hot gas by time
dt1 End of defrost temperature, main
evaporator
dP1 Maximum defrost duration
2
9, 10, 11 = Do not select
12 = Auxiliary output
Setting H1/H5 = 2 the corresponding output AUX1/ AUX2 is activated by
the key AUX1/ AUX2 or from DI if set. In addition, a digital input DI1, DI2
or DI3 (set A11, A5 or A9 = 12) can be used to control AUX1 or AUX2. In
this case the key and the digital input have the same priority as regards
the switch on.
4.6.7
Min
0
Max
3
UoM
-
4.0
-50.0 200.0
°C/°F
30
1
250
min
Evaporator Fans
During the dripping periods (parameter dd > 0) and post-dripping periods
(parameter Fd > 0) the evaporator fans are always off. This is useful to
allow the evaporator to return to normal temperature after defrost. There
is the possibility to force the start of the evaporator fans during control
(parameter F2) and during defrost (parameter F3). See chap. 6
13 = Do not select
14 = Continuous cycle activation
Activation: passage of the contact from opened to closed;
Deactivation: passage of the contact from closed to opened.
Par.
dd
F2
F3
15 = Alarm from generic function
Digital inputs DI2 and DI3 can be associated with special alarms, using
the generic functions, and can be activated with the input open or closed
(see the paragraph on Generic functions).
Fd
16 = Start/stop defrost from external contact
Application: an external device is used to start the defrost (on closing
the digital input) and subsequently stop it (on opening the digital input).
When the digital input opens, the dripping time set for parameter dd
must then elapse.
Description
Dripping time after defrost (fans off )
Fan activation time with compressor OFF
Evaporator fan during defrost
0/1=on/off
Post dripping time (fans off )
4.6.8
Def
2
30
1
Min
0
0
0
Max
30
60
1
UoM
min
-
1
0
30
min
Door opening
If the door is left open, the signalling control is made via the door
switch (if A3=1, digital input DI1, already configured as the door switch,
is disabled). When the door is open, the evaporator fans are turned off
if configured at fixed speed (F0=0,1), otherwise operate at minimum
speed defined by parameter F7 (if F7<50) if set as variable speed fans
(F0= 2); the compressor continues to operate for the time c12, then turns
off. Once passed the period of time d8d from door opening, compressor
and evaporator fans are running again and the error “dor” is displayed.
Note:
• if following the start of the defrost, the digital input does not open
before the time dP1 elapses, the defrost will terminate by time and
alarm Ed1 will be displayed (defrost ended by timeout).
• opening of the digital input does not start the defrost only if the
defrost probe (e.g. B2) temperature is greater than dt1 (end defrost
temperature on main evaporator).
• if a separate defrost is configured on two evaporators (d13=1) and
start/stop defrost from external contact is set, both evaporators are
defrosted at the same time.
Par. Description
c12 Compressor safety time, door switch
0 = disabled door management
d8d Compressor restart time for door switch
Def
5
Min
0
Max
5
UoM
min
30
c12
240
min
Special cases refer figure 4.n and 4.o:
• to disable door alarm, set d8d =0. If d8d = 0, c12 is also considered =0;
• to keep only phase 2 (figure), in which the compressor is on, and to
eliminate phase 3 in which the compressor/ evaporator fan is off, set
d8d=c12;
• to keep only phase 3 (figure), c12=0;
• during phase 3 the compressor may be on if:
1. pump down is activated;
2. hot gas defrost is activated.
Note: If the door switch digital input DI1 is disabled (A3=1):
• Parameters C12 and d8d have no meaning, as the controller
cannot know whether the door is open or closed
17 = Serious alarm
Application: external alarm that causes the immediate deactivation of the
outputs on UltraCella (except those configured as a light/alarm) so as to
prevent a dangerous situation. This can be used, for example, to stop the
compressor following activation of the “Cold room occupied” alarm or to
deactivate the heaters if an external protection device is activated.
When the alarm is activated:
• a signal is shown on the display (‘SA’);
• the buzzer is activated, if enabled
• the alarm relay is activated, if selected;
• The door open icon
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
Def
0
36
will always be off
ENG
Compressor on
before door opening
open
open
Door
switch
Door
switch
close
close
ON
ON
Evaporator
fan
Evaporator
fan
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
CMP
CMP
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Door
alarm
Door
alarm
1
2
3
4
OFF
The light can be managed:
• from door switch (if A3=0) and/or light key;
• only from light key.
Below are indicated the involved parameters.
Par. Description
tLi Light on with door open
A4 Light management
Min
0
0
Max
240
1
UoM
min
-
Note: if the control is OFF, the light output is controlled only by
the light key. If the control is set to ON, the light is controlled by a
door switch + light key or just light key according to the setting of the
parameter A4.
1
2
3
4.7.1
4
d8d
d8d
Door switch + light key
If A4=1 the light is on/off only using the light key. The open/closed status
of the door is ignored. If A4=0, when the cold room door is opened, the
light is always on. When the door is closed, the light can be turned on or
off using the light key. Once turned on, the light will automatically turn
off after the time set in parameter tLi.
t
c12
Fig. 4.n
Def
120
0
0 Door switch + light key
1 Light key
OFF
t
c12
4.7 Light management
Compressor off
before door opening
Fig. 4.o
Key
t
Door_sw
Evap_fan
CMP
Dor alarm
Time
door switch
Evaporator fan
Compressor
Door alarm “dor”
LIGHT CONTROL FROM DOOR SWITCH AND LIGHT KEY
A4=0
ON
Light_K
Note: to render the time settings operational, the control must
restart. Otherwise, the settings will be used only at the next use,
when the inner timers are set.
OFF
OP
Door_sw
4.6.9
CL
Compressor management
ON
• c1 determines the minimum time between two consecutive starts of
the compressor;
Li
• c2 sets the minimum turn off time for the compressor.
• c3 sets the minimum running time for the compressor.
Par. Description
Def
c1
Minimum time between two successive 6
starts of the compressor
c2
Compressor minimum switch-off time
3
c3
Compressor minimum switch-on time
3
OFF
Min
0
Max
30
UoM
min
0
0
15
15
min
min
tLi
t
Fig. 4.q
Key
Light_k
Li
Door_sw
tLi
t
c1
c3
tLi
c2
ON
Light key
Light
Door switch
Light turn off delay
Time
Step1
4.8 Other configuration parameters
OFF
The configuration parameters must be set during the commissioning of
the controller and concern:
• date/time set;
• measurement stability of the analogue probes;
• display of the decimal point on control;
• serial address for monitoring network connection;
• ithe type of protocol on the BMS serial port for connection to the
supervisor network
• temperature (°C / °F) and pressure (bar/psi) measurement unit
• disabling of keyboard, keys and buzzer;
• display view during defrost.
ON
Step2
OFF
Power_ON
t
c0 c11
Fig. 4.p
Note: c2 parameter used to ensure the balance of the pressure
after the compressor stop and to avoid blocking at the next
reboot of those compressors that do not have sufficient starting torque.
Date/ time set
See example 2 in chap.3.
37
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
Starting from software release 1.7, the baud rate, stop bits and parity of
the BMS port can be set using parameters H10, H11 and H12; the data bits
setting on the other hand remains fixed at 8.
Analogue probes measuring stability
It defines the filter coefficient used to stabilize the temperature
measurement. Low values assigned to this parameter allow a prompt
response of the sensor to temperature variations, but the reading
becomes more sensitive to disturbance. High values slow down the
response, but guarantee greater immunity to disturbance, that is, a more
stable and more precise reading.
Par.
/21
/22
/23
/24
/25
Description
Stability measuring probe 1
Stability measuring probe 2
Stability measuring probe 3
Stability measuring probe 4
Stability measuring probe 5
Def
4
4
4
4
4
Min
0
0
0
0
0
Max
9
9
9
9
9
Par.
H10
UoM
-
H11
H12
Display view
On models with single row display, P/Ns WB000S*, it is possible to show a
single characteristic, selectable through /t1 parameter.
On models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, and on the UltraCella Service
terminal, it is possible to show two different characteristics, the first
selectable through /t1 parameter, and the second through /t2 parameter.
Par. Description
/t1 Display variable 1
0 None
1 Virtual probe
2 Outlet probe
3 Intake probe
4 Defrost probe 1
5 Defrost probe 2
6 Temp. set point
7 B1
8 B2
/t2 Display variable 2
0 None
1 Virtual probe
2
Outlet probe
3
Intake probe
4
5
6
7
8
Defrost probe 1
Defrost probe 2
Set point
B1
B2
9
B3
10 B4
11 B5
Def
1
9
10
11
12
13
14
Min
0
Max
13
/SP
23
-
/6
12 rd
13 superheat (EVD
EVO)
14 valve opening %
(EVD EVO)
15 valve opening
step (EVD EVO)
16 Sc
17 Sd1 (3PH mod.)
18 Sd2 (3PH mod.)
19 Sc (3PH mod.)
20 Variable speed
condenser fans
set point
21 Superheat
(EVDice)
22 Valve opening %
(EVDice)
23 Step valve
opening (EVDice)
H4
Description
Serial Address
Par.
H6
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
Description
Temperature unit of measure
0/1 = °C / °F
Pressure unit of measure
0/1 = bar / psi
Display decimal point
0/1 = yes/no
Buzzer
0/1 = enabled/disabled
Description
Terminal keys block configuration
0 = all keys enabled.
255 = all keys disabled
FUNCTION
Set-point modification
Defrost
AUX1output
PRG+SET (menu)
AUX2 output
On/Off management
Light management
Def
193
Min
0
Max
247
UoM
-
1
2
-
0
0
2
-
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
UoM
-
0
0
1
-
0
0
1
-
0
0
1
-
Def
0
Min
0
Max
255
UoM
-
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
par. H6
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
Tab. 4.e
Example: to disable the activation functions of the outputs AUX1 and
AUX2, set H6 = 8+32 = 40.
Note: H0 maximum value is 207 for CAREL protocol and 247 for
Modbus protocol.
Description
BMS serial protocol
0= CAREL protocol
1= Modbus protocol
2
Configuration table
Starting from software release 1.5, both CAREL and Modbus protocols
are available on the BMS serial port, selected by parameter H7.
Par.
H7
38400
57600
76800
115200
375000
Disable keypad
You can inhibit some functions relating to the use of the keypad, for
example, the modification of the parameters and the set point if the unit
is accessible to the public
Serial address (parameter H0)
H0 assigns an address to check for serial connection to a supervision
system and / or remote assistance.
Par.
H0
5
6
7
8
9
Temperature unit of measure and decimal point display
The control allows:
• choosing the temperature measuring unit between Celsius (°C) and
Fahrenheit (° F) degrees;
• to enable/disable the display of the decimal point and buzzer.
UoM
-
Par.
/5t
0
Def Min Max UoM
4
0
9
-
Note: to make the changes active, switch the unit off and on
again.
B3
B4
B5
Sc
Variable speed
condenser fans
set point
Humid. set
point
6
Description
BMS baud rate bit/s
0
1200
1
2400
2
4800
3
9600
4
19200
BMS stop bits
1
1 stop bit
2
2 stop bits
BMS parity
1
odd
2
even
UoM
-
38
ENG
4.9 Ultra EVD EVO module commissioning
PVt
1
2
3
WM00ENNI00, WM00EUN000, WM00EUK000: Connect UltraCella to
the EVD module via serial, as shown in the wiring diagram in Figure 2.k,
and refer to the following parameter table for configuration of the EVD
EVO driver. The module will become active when enabled by UltraCella,
setting P1=1.
Par. Description
Def
P1 Enable communication with EVD EVO 0
module
1 = EVD EVO module enabled
Min
0
Max
1
Alco ex6
Alco ex7
Alco ex8
330hz CAREL
recommended
7 Alco ex8
500hz alco
specification
8 Sporlan sei
0.5-11
9 Sporlan ser
1.5-20
10 Sporlan sei 30
UoM
-
11 Sporlan sei 50
• H1=7 (for AUX1) or H5=7 (for AUX2) -> delayed second compressor
• C11=0 -> second compressor activation delay = 0
H5
C11
Description
AUX1 output configuration
7 = Delayed compressor
AUX2 output configuration
7 = Delayed compressor
Second compressor start delay
0 = instant start with main compressor
output
Def
1
Min
0
Max
17
UoM
-
1
0
17
-
4
0
250
sec
PH
PrE
2. Configuring the EVD EVO driver from UltraCella
Connect UltraCella to the EVD EVO module via serial, as shown in the
wiring diagram in Figure 2.k, and refer to the following parameter table
for configuration of the EVD EVO driver. The module will become active
when enabled by UltraCella, setting P1=1.
If connected via serial, the driver parameters can only be displayed (not
modified) on the EVD EVO local display. Once the driver has been enabled
(parameter P1=1), its parameter settings will be sent by UltraCella, in
accordance with the parameter table below (only modifiable from
UltraCella); any parameters previously configured on the EVD EVO display
will be overwritten.
Min
0
Max
1
P0
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
PL1
PL2
PL3
cP1
PM1
PM2
PM3
Pdd
PSb
PMP
PMu
Pnr
UoM
-
EVD EVO parameter table
The following parameters corresponding to the EVD EVO driver can be
configured from UltraCella.
Category: EVO
Par. Description
P1 Enable communication with EVD EVO
module 0/1=disabled/enabled
P1t S1 probe type
0
0
3
-
P1M Max value of S1 probe
12,8
-20
200
P1n Min value of S1 probe
-1
-20
200
bar/
psi
Bar/
psi
0 RAZ. 0-5V
1 4 to 20mA
PLt
PHS
PSP
PSI
PSd
PSM
Def Min Max UoM
0
0
1
-
2 4 to 20mA REMOTE
3 4 to 20mA EXTERNAL
39
R22
R134a
R404A
R407C
R410A
R507A
R290
R600
R600A
R717
R744
R728
R1270
R417A
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
1
1
22
-
3
1
25
-
2
1
4
-
198
10
15
150
2
3
600
600
-50
600
600
50
50
600
10
10
0
0
0
0
1
-72
0
0
0
-72
0
0
-60
0
0
0
-60
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
247
324
800
999
800
324
800
999
200
800
999
100
200
800
999
60
100
1
999
1
K
sec
sec
K
sec
sec
°C/°F
sec
sec
%
°C/°F
sec
sec
min
step
step
-
2.0
15.0
5.0
120
0
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
10.0
50.0
100.0
1200
100
1
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F
s
s
/
12 Sporlan seh 100
13 Sporlan seh 175
14 Danfoss ets 12.5
- 25b
15 Danfoss ets 50b
16 Danfoss ets 100b
17 Danfoss ets 250
18 Danfoss ets 400
19 two CAREL exv
connected together
20 Sporlan ser(i) g, j, k
21 Danfoss ccm 1020-30
22 Danfoss ccm 40
Refrigerant type
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
In this way, the auxiliary output will be configured as a voltage-free contact
to control the compressor, suitable to be connected to digital input DI1
on the EVD EVO driver. No configuration is required on UltraCella.
Par. Description
Def
P1 Enable communication with EVD EVO 1
module
1 = EVD EVO module enabled
Carel exv
Alco ex4
Alco ex5
4
5
6
WM00ENSI00, WM00ENS000, WM00EUS000, WM00EUC000:
1. Using the EVD EVO display to configure the driver
Connect an auxiliary output on UltraCella (AUX1 or AUX2) electrically to
digital input DI1 on the EVD EVO and set the parameters as follows:
Par.
H1
Valve type
R422D
R413A
R422A
R423A
R407A
R427A
R245FA
R407F
R32
HTR01
HTR02
R23
R1234yf
R1234ze
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
R455A
R170
R442A
R447A
R448A
R449A
R450A
R452A
R508B
R452B
R513A
R454B
Main regulation type
1 centralized cabinet cold room
2 self contained cabinetcold room
3 perturbated cabinet cold room
4 subcritical CO2 cabinet/cold room
EVD Modbus address
Superheat setpoint
Proportional gain
Integral time
Derivative time
LowSH: threshold low superheat
Low Superheat protection integral time
LowSH: low superheat alarm delay
LOP: threshold for low temp. of evapor.
LOP: integral time
LOP: low evaporation temperature alarm delay
Open valve startup, Percentage
MOP: max evap. pressure threshold
MOP: integral time
MOP: max evap. pressure alarm delay
Post defrost delay, only for single driver
Valve position in stand-by
Enable manual positioning
Manual valve positioning
Reset EVD setting 0 -> 1 Reset all EVD EVO
parameters
Stop smooth lines offset
Maximum smooth lines offset
Smooth lines proportional coefficient
Smooth lines integral time
Smooth lines derivative time
Enable smooth lines (0=NO - 1=YES)
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
Replacing UltraCella due to a fault / other causes:
The signature on UltraCella will be equal to 0 (as it is new or has not been
previously configured to communicate with an EVDice driver), while
EVDice will have a signature (signature other than 0). In this case, the
initially active parameters will be those set on EVDice (the parameters
corresponding to the EVDice driver will be copied to UltraCella). The case
is identical to a new installation / new system.
4.10 EVDice commissioning
Connect UltraCella to the EVDice driver via the serial line according to the
wiring diagram shown in Figure 2.o, and refer to the parameter table 4.e
below for configuration of the EVDice driver.
UltraCella software release 1.7 features new EVDice driver management
functions:
• Possibility to configure the EVDice parameters on the UltraCella user
interface (built-in LED display or UltraCella Service terminal) and/or on
the local EVDice LED display user interface.
• EVDice custom configuration protection by signature: as soon as
communication is established, UltraCella “signs” EVDice by writing a
random number between 1 and 65000 to a register on the driver. This
allows unique identification of:
- EVDice drivers that have been previously configured
- “new” EVDice drivers (e.g. replaced due to a fault)
There are three possible cases:
Par.
IPE
ICG
Min
0
0
0
Max UoM
1
1
-
EVD ICE parameter table
The following parameters correspond to the EVD ICE driver, and are
configured on UltraCella.
Replacing EVDice due to a fault / other causes:
1. UltraCella will have a signature other than 0 (as it has been previously
configured to manage an EVDice driver), while the EVDice will have a
different signature from the one saved on UltraCella (either 0 if new,
or a number other than 0 if originating from another installation). In
this case, the initially active parameters will be those set on UltraCella
(the parameters on UltraCella corresponding to the EVDice driver will
be copied to the EVDice). Proceed as follows:
• The IEM alarm (EVDice error mismatch) is active to warn the user that
an element in the system has been changed. If necessary, modify the
EVDice parameters based on the application, either using the wizard, or
parameter-by-parameter on the LED display interface;
• The controller is will active even when the IEM alarm is active; to
on the UltraCella LED display.
2. The signature on UltraCella will be equal to 0 (as it is new or has not
been previously configured to communicate with an EVDice driver),
while EVDice will have a signature (signature other than 0). In this
case, the initially active parameters will be those set on EVDice (the
parameters corresponding to the EVDice driver will be copied to
UltraCella). The case is identical to a new installation / new system:
• Confirm that the EVDice is present by setting IPE=1 (communication
with EVDice enabled), or by answering “yes” to a specific question in the
wizard on the UltraCella Service terminal; UltraCella will sign the EVDice
so as to create the controller-driver combination;
• The IEC (EVDice configuration error) alarm will be activated and the
controller (and the compressor) will stop (UltraCella forces parameter
ICG=0, EVDice not enabled for control). Configure the EVDice parameters
based on the application, either using the wizard, or parameter-byparameter on the LED display interface;
• Once all of the required EVDice parameters have been configured, set
ICG=1 to activate control. Setting ICG=1 also resets the IEC alarm.
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
Def
0
Note: when IPE=0 (communication with EVDice disabled), the
only parameters visible on the UltraCella built-in LED display are:
IPE, IrE (EVDice operating mode), IP3 (superheat set point), PH (type of
refrigerant) and In1 (EVDice serial address from UltraCella)
Note: the signature on EVDice can be set to zero using the reset
procedure on the built-in LED interface (see EVDice manual
+0300037EN)
Note: the above are valid for EVDice firmware release 1.4;
UltraCella software release 1.7 in any case maintains compatibility
with EVDice drivers featuring previous firmware releases. In particular, the
IEC and IEM alarms will be always disabled, parameters IPE and ICG will
have always the same value and UltraCella will not generate any signature
Note: in UltraCella software release 1.7, the EVDice firmware
release is read-only when parameter IPE=1 (communication with
EVDice enabled)
New installation / New system / EVDice installed following installation:
in this case, the signature on UltraCella will initially be 0 -> the active
parameters will be those set on EVDice, and UltraCella will generate a
new signature. Proceed as follows:
1. Confirm that the EVDice is present by setting IPE=1 (communication
with EVDice enabled), or by answering “yes” to a specific question in
the wizard on the UltraCella Service terminal; UltraCella will sign the
EVDice so as to create the controller-driver combination;
2. The IEC (EVDice configuration error) alarm will be activated and the
controller (and the compressor) will stop (UltraCella forces parameter
ICG=0, EVDice not enabled for control). Configure the EVDice
parameters based on the application, either using the wizard, or
parameter-by-parameter on the LED display interface;
3. Once all of the required EVDice parameters have been configured, set
ICG=1 to activate control. Setting ICG=1 also resets the IEC alarm.
disable the alarm, press
Description
Enable EVDice communication
0/1 = disabled / enabled
Enable EVDice control
0/1 = disabled / enabled
40
ENG
Category: ICE
Parameter name Description
on EVD ICE
Def
Min
Max
UoM
Enable EVD ICE
/1 = not enabled/ enabled
Operating mode 1=Multiplexed cabinet/cold room
2=Air-conditioner/chiller with plate heat
exchanger
3=Air-conditioner/chiller with tube bundle
heat exchanger
4=Air-conditioner/chiller with finned coil
heat exchanger
5=Reserved
6=Reserved
0
0
1
-
Advanced
IPE
9
9
1
1
6
(modes 2,
3, 4, 5 and 6
can only be
selected on
UltraCella
service
pGD)
-
Initial
configuration
IrE
9
9
Superheat
Superheat set point
11
C1
99
K
IP3
9
9
Type of gas
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
3
1
40
-
Initial
configuration
Initial
configuration
IPH
9
9
S1
Type of probe S1
1=-1 to 4.2 barg
2=0.4 to 9.3 barg
3=-1 to 9.3 barg
4=0 to 17.3 barg
5=0.85 to 34.2 barg
6=0 to 34.5 barg
7=0 to 45 barg
8=-1 to 12.8 barg
9=0 to 20.7 barg
10=1.86 to 43.0 barg
11 = Reserved
PID: proportional gain
PID: integral time
LowSH protection: threshold
LowSH protection: integral time
LOP protection: threshold
LOP protection: integral time
MOP protection: threshold
MOP protection: integral time
MOP protection: disable threshold
Low suction temperature alarm threshold
Enable operating mode modification
0/1 = enabled/not enabled
Enable manual valve positioning
0/1 = enabled/not enabled
Manual valve position
Valve control steps: 1/2 = 480/960 step
Valve opening at start (evaporator/valve
capacity ratio)
Serial address
Enable EVD ICE regulation
0/1 = not enabled/ enabled
3
1
11
-
Advanced
IS1
9
9
15
150
5
15
-50
0
50
20
30
-121
0
0
0
-9
0
-121
0
C3
0
-121
-392
0
800
999
IP3
800
C5
800
392
800
200
200
1
sec
°C/°F
sec
°C/°F
sec
°C/°F
sec
°C/°F
°C/°F
-
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
ICP
Iti
IC1
IC2
IC3
IC4
IC5
IC6
IC7
IC8
IIA
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
-
0
0
1
-
Advanced
IU1
9
-
0
1
50
0
1
0
999
2
100
step Advanced
Advanced
% Advanced
IU2
IU3
IU4
9
9
9
9
-
99
0
1
0
99
1
In1
ICG
9
9
9
9
-
CP
ti
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
IA
U1
U2
U3
U4
n1
-
R22
R134a
R404A
R407C
R410A
R507A
R290
R600
R600A
R717
R744
R728
R1270
R417A
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
R422D
R413A
R422A
R423A
R407A
R427A
R245FA
R407F
R32
HTR01
HTR02
R23
R1234yf
R1234ze
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
R455A
R170
R442A
R447A
R448A
R449A
R450A
R452A
R508B
R452B
R513A
R454B
-
Type
Advanced
Advanced
Parameter Present on
Present
name on
UltraCella
in wizard
UltraCella Service pGD (UltraCella
(LED display)
Service pGD)
Note: as EVD ICE has a two digit display, when its parameters are
displayed on UltraCella, the letter “I” has been added to every
parameter code: e.g. S1 -> IS1
Note: all EVD ICE parameters are visible both on the LED user
interface and on the UltraCella Service terminal (pGD).
41
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
4.11.2 Parameters (UltraCella)
4.11 Ultra 3Ph Evaporator module
commissioning
UltraCella has a subset of parameters dedicated to Ultra 3PH Evaporator
module configuration.
Ultra 3PH Evaporator module has to be configured by UltraCella.
1. Please make sure that, inside Ultra 3PH Evaporator module, dip-switches
of I/O expansion are set as per following figure (default setting):
Category: 3PH
Par
cH1
cH2
cH3
Description
3PH module serial address
3PH module offset serial address
Type of three phase module
0 = Evaporator
1 = Full
Sd1 probe connection
0 = in UltraCella
1 = in 3PH module
Sd2 probe connection
0 = in UltraCella
1 = in 3PH module
Sc probe connection
(Full module only)
0 = in UltraCella
1 = in 3PH module
Enable 3PH mod.
0 = disable
1 = enable
cA1
cA2
Address
Ext Baud Prot
cA3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
with offset
no offset
19.2 K
9.6 K
38.4 K
57.6 K
cEn
CAREL
Modbus
Def
15
0
0
Min
1
0
0
Max
247
232
1
UOM
-
0
0
1
-
0
0
1
-
0
0
1
-
0
0
1
-
ON
OFF
Address
4.11.3 Function
Ext. Baud Prot
Ultra 3PH Evaporator Module has to be combined with UltraCella controls
(P/Ns WB000S% or WB000D%). Module has inside high power actuators
to handle directly three-phase loads of the evaporator, but logic and
regulation algorithms are inside UltraCella.
In the table below details of where probes and loads can be connected.
Fig. 4.r
which corresponds to following configuration:
• Address = 15
• No offset
• Baudrate = 19200bit/sec
• Protocol = Modbus
2. In UltraCella, access to parameter category “3PH”
Note:
• Although three-phase loads have to be physically connected to Ultra
3. Make sure that first two parameters are set as follows (Carel default
3PH Evaporator module, UltraCella maintains its standard configuration
of relays.
setting):
• cH1 = 15 (Address)
• cH2 = 0 (Offset)
4. For 3PH Evaporator module, set (Carel default setting)
UltraCella
• cH3 = 0
Input
Ambient probe
5. If defrost probe and auxiliary evaporator defrost probe have to be
connected to Ultra 3PH Evaporator module, set:
• cA1 = 1
• cA2 = 1
For Ultra 3PH Evaporator module, don’t consider parameter cA3
Defrost probe Sd1
3
-
Defrost probe auxiliary
evaporator Sd2
6. Enable 3PH Evaporator module by setting:
• cEn = 1
3
-
Note: to ensure the communication between UltraCella and the
expansion module, the I/O expansion network address and parameter
cH1 on UltraCella must be set to the same value (default 15).
Output
Compressor command /
Condensing unit enabling
/ Solenoid valve
Important:
This setting of the dipswitches on the I/O expansion (corresponding to
serial address 15) is active starting from November 2015 and guarantees
“plug & play” communication with UltraCella controllers running software
release 1.7 (default value cH1=15).
Expansion modules manufactured prior to November 2015 have the
default address setting as 1 (different dipswitch configuration than
shown in the figure). UltraCella controllers running a software release
lower than 1.7 are set with cH1=1 by default. In some cases, then, the two
configurations will need to be aligned manually.
Defrost heaters
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
3
Evaporator fans
Light
AUX1
AUX2
Connected
Ultra 3PH Evaporator
module
cA1 = 0
cA1 = 1
3
cA2 = 0
cA2 = 1
3
UltraCella
Ultra 3PH Evaporator
module
3
(1PH)
3
(1PH)
3
(1PH)
3
(1PH)
3
(1PH)
3
(1PH)
3
(1PH)
3
(3PH)
3
(3PH)
3
(1PH)
-
Tab. 4.f
42
ENG
4.12.1 Parameters (UltraCella)
4.12 Ultra 3Ph Full module commissioning
UltraCella ha un sottoinsieme di parametri dedicati alla configurazione
del modulo Ultra 3PH Full.
Ultra 3PH Full module has to be configured by UltraCella.
1. Please make sure that, inside Ultra 3PH Full module, dip-switches of
I/O expansion are set as per following figure (default setting):
Par
cH1
cH2
cH3
Description
3PH module serial address
3PH module offset serial address
Type of three phase module
0 = Evaporator
1 = Full
Sd1 probe connection
0 = in UltraCella
1 = in 3PH module
Sd2 probe connection
0 = in UltraCella
1 = in 3PH module
Sc probe connection
(Full module only)
0 = in UltraCella
1 = in 3PH module
Enable 3PH mod.
0 = disable
1 = enable
cA1
cA2
Address
Ext Baud Prot
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
cA3
with offset
no offset
19.2 K
9.6 K
38.4 K
57.6 K
CAREL
Modbus
cEn
ON
OFF
Address
Def
15
0
0
Min
1
0
0
Max
247
232
1
UoM
-
0
0
1
-
0
0
1
-
0
0
1
-
0
0
1
-
Ext. Baud Prot
Fig. 4.s
4.12.2 Function
which corresponds to following configuration:
• Address = 15
• No offset
• Baudrate = 19200bit/sec
• Protocol = Modbus
Ultra 3PH Full Module has to be combined with UltraCella controls (P/
Ns WB000S% or WB000D%). Module has inside high power actuators
to handle directly three-phase loads of the condensing and evaporator
units, but logic and regulation algorithms are inside UltraCella.
In the table below details of where probes and loads can be connected.
2. In UltraCella, access to parameter category “3PH”
Nota:
• Although three-phase loads have to be physically connected to Ultra
3. Make sure that first two parameters are set as follows (Carel default
3PH Full module, UltraCella maintains its standard configuration of
relays.
setting):
• cH1 = 15 (Address)
• cH2 = 0 (Offset)
Input
Ambient probe
4. For 3PH Full expansion module, set
• cH3 = 1
Defrost probe Sd1
5. If defrost probe and auxiliary evaporator defrost probe have to be
connected to Ultra 3PH Full module, set:
• cA1 = 1
• cA2 = 1
UltraCella
3
3
-
Defrost probe auxiliary
evaporator Sd2
3
-
6. If condenser probe has to be connected to Ultra 3PH Full module, set:
• cA3 = 1
Condensing probe Sc
7. Enable 3PH Full module by setting:
3
-
• cEn = 1
Uscita
Compressor command
Note: to ensure the communication between UltraCella and the
expansion module, the I/O expansion network address and parameter
cH1 on UltraCella must be set to the same value (default 15).
Defrost heaters
Evaporator fans
Important: this setting of the dipswitches on the I/O expansion
(corresponding to serial address 15) is active starting from November
2015 and guarantees “plug & play” communication with UltraCella
controllers running software release 1.7 (default value cH1=15). Expansion
modules manufactured prior to November 2015 have the default address
setting as 1 (different dipswitch configuration than shown in the figure).
UltraCella controllers running a software release lower than 1.7 are set
with cH1=1 by default. In some cases, then, the two configurations will
need to be aligned manually.
Light
AUX1
AUX2
UltraCella
3
(1PH)
3
(1PH)
3
(1PH)
3
(1PH)
3
(1PH)
3
(1PH)
Connected
Ultra 3PH Full module
cA1 = 0
cA1 = 1
3
cA2 = 0
cA2 = 1
3
cA3 = 0
cA3 = 1
3
Ultra 3PH Full module
3
(3PH)
3
(3PH)
3
(3PH)
3
(1PH)
-
Tab. 4.g
43
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
5. OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION AND PROTECTIONS
5.1 Analogue output
5.2.3
It is available analog output Y1, to drive the evaporator fans designed to
be operated with input 0 ... 10 V. See the chapter 6.9.
The AUX1 and AUX2 outputs can be associated with different functions,
such as alarm, auxiliary output controlled by AUX button, the pump down
valve, condenser fan, compressor, second compressor with rotation. For
further explanations, please consult chapter 3.2.
Par.
HO1
Description
Configuration output Y1
0 Not active
1 Modulating output (generic
function)
2 Variable speed evaporator fans set
on Sd probe
3 Variable speed condenser fans
Def
0
Min
0
Max
3
UoM
-
Par.
H1
Delay start for compressor output
Par. Description
c0 Compressor/ fan start delay at power on
Def
0
Min
0
Max
15
UoM
min
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
• c0: from the moment in which the control is powered-up, turning
on the compressor and the evaporator fan is delayed by a time (in
minutes) equal to the value assigned to this parameter. This delay
helps to protect the compressor against repeated starts in the case of
frequent power failures.
H5
Note: for the other protection parameters (c1, c2, c3) see
chapter 4.
5.2.2
Par.
c11
Safety devices for outputs with different relays
Description
Second compressor start delay
Def
4
Min
0
Max UoM
250
s
• c11 sets the activation delay between the first and the second
compressor (or between the first and the second step of the
compressor).
c1
c3
c2
ON
Step1
OFF
ON
Step2
OFF
Power_ON
t
c0 c11
Fig. 5.a
Key
Step1
Step2
t
Step 1 compressor
Step 2 compressor
Time
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
Description
AUX1 output configuration
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
5.2 Digital Outputs
5.2.1
Output operation AUX1/AUX2
44
Def
1
Min
0
Max
21
UoM
-
1
0
17
-
Normally energised alarm
Normally de-energised alarm
Activate from AUX button or DI
Activate collection pan heater
Auxiliary evaporator defrost
Pump down valve
Condenser fan
Delayed compressor
Control output 1 ON/OFF
Control output 2 ON/OFF
Alarm output 1
Alarm output 2
Do not select
Second compressor step
Second compressor step with
rotation
Humidity output
Reverse mode output
Output managed by time band
Control output 3 ON/OFF
Reverse output - dehumidification
External dehumidifier
Reverse mode output 2
AUX2 output configuration
See H1
ENG
6. CONTROL
6.1 Switching the controller ON and OFF
6.3 Set point
The state of ON/OFF can be controlled by more than one source, keyboard,
digital input and supervisor. When the controller is off, the display will
show the temperature selected for parameter /t1 alternating with the
OFF message. The digital input can be used to switch the controller on/
off, setting parameter A5/A9 to “6”. The activation state of ON / OFF from
digital input has priority over the one from the supervisor and keyboard.
The reference output is the compressor (CMP).
The controller can operate in two different modes, that can be selected
using parameter r3:
• direct with defrost;
• direct without defrost;
Origin
Digital input
Keyboard
Supervisor
Par.
St
rd
r1
r2
r3
Priority Notes
1
Disable On/Off from keypad and supervisor
2
3
Tab. 6.a
Description
Set point
Differential
Minimum set point
Maximum set point
Operating mode
0 Direct with defrost
1 Direct without defrost
The control output of the controller is the compressor output. The control
probe is the ambient probe B1 (default setting), while the probes B2, B3,
B4, B5 may be associated with the functions of defrost probe 1/2, outlet
probe, intake probe, condenser probe. If the cold room is very large you
should also use a second probe to control the temperature of the room.
The controller will activate the compressor based on the requirements
of the virtual probe (Sv), obtained from weighed average of the 2 probes
(B1, B2).
Description
Virtual probe composition
0 = probe B1
100 = probe B2
Def
0
Min
0
Max
100
Max
r2
20
r2
200
1
UoM
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F
-
OFF
rd
Sv
St
Fig. 6.b
Key
St
rd
Sv
CMP
UoM
-
Set point
Differential
Virtual probe
Compressor
If you have activated the second compressor output (H1, H5 = 13, 14) on
AUX output, the activation of the compressor is at St + rd/2 and that of
the auxiliary compressor AUX in St + rd, according to the figure below.
The /4 parameter is used to determine the virtual probe (Sv) as a weighted
average of the control sensor probe B1 and B2, according to the formula:
Sv=
Min
r1
0.1
-50
r1
0
CMP
ON
6.2 Virtual probe
Par.
/4
Def
0
2.0
-50
60
0
[(B1*(100-/4)+B2*/4]
100
AUX
ON
OFF
ON
CMP
OFF
rd/2 rd
rd/2
Sv
St
Fig. 6.c
Key
UltraCella
St
rd
Sv
CMP
AUX
Fig. 6.a
The control set point, in normally operating conditions, is indicated by
parameter St.
This value may however change based on other algorithms:
• Change set point from digital input (St+r4 and/or StH+r5)
• Change set point from time band (St+r4 and/or StH+r5)
• Set point variation by ramp (variable set point)
with the following priority:
Key
B1
B2
Set point
Differential
Virtual probe
Compressor
Auxiliary output
Outlet probe
Intake probe
Priority
Function
1
Set point variation from digital input
(A5/A9=7)
Set point variation by time band
St+r4 - StH+r5
Set point variation (ramps)
Variable
according to
parameters PS1,
PS2, PS3 and PH1,
PH2, PH3
Set point by parameter St
St
2
3
4
45
Control set
point value
St+r4 - StH+r5
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
6.3.1
Example: to have a control set point of 4°C from Monday to Saturday,
08:30 to 18:30, and 9°C at all other times, set:
• St = 4;
• r4 = 5;
• dSn = 9;
• hSn = 8;
• MSn = 30;
• hSF = 18;
• MSF = 30;
• H9 = 1 -> if H9=0 the time band will never be active
Set point variation from digital input
With UltraCella, the control set point can be changed using digital inputs
DI2 and DI3. This function may be useful in applications where the control
set point can be increased when the store is not open to the public (for
example, at night), thus guaranteeing energy savings and the certainty
that the product is ready for display and sale when needed.
Digital input DI2 is associated with parameter A5, while digital input DI3
is associated with parameter A9. To enable set point variation from digital
input, set A5=7 (for DI2) or A9=7 (for DI3).
Par.
A5
A9
Description
Configuration of digital input 2 (DI2)
7 = set point variation
Configuration of digital input 3 (DI3)
7 = set point variation
Def
0
Min
0
Max
15
UoM
-
0
0
15
-
Note: when change set point is enabled and the current set point
is St+r4 (and/or Sth +r5), the SET button flashes to indicate that
the control set point is not the value indicated by parameter St or StH.
Note: if the second row of the display shows the set point (/t2 =
6, on models where featured), the value displayed will be the
effective control set point (therefore, either St or St + r4, depending on
whether or not the time band is active).
When the digital input is active (closed), the control set point will be the
sum of the values of parameters St and r4; when the digital input is not
active (open), the control set point will be the value set for parameter St
(normal operation).
• DI2 / DI3 not active (open) -> control set point = St
• DI2 / DI3 active (close) -> control set point = St + r4
Par.
r4
r5
Description
Set point offset
Humidity set point offset
Def
3.0
0.0
6.3.3
Min Max
-60
60
-50.0 50.0
Very large cold rooms used to preserve food at below-zero temperatures
(freezers) may, for logistics or constructional reasons, require concrete
floors. Initially, the cold room, and thus its floor, which are initially at
ambient temperature, if cooled to the set point in the shortest possible
time (pull down), cracks may form in the floor, causing significant damage.
For this reason, in these types of cold rooms ramps of variable duration
and intensity are used to bring the cold room to the set point over a time
that is suitable for the concrete floor.
On UltraCella, ramps can be configured that are divided into three phases.
The slope of the ramp depends on the final temperature set point and
the duration of each phase.
Phase 1: typically this is an initial cooling ramp, from ambient temperature
to a final temperature around 0°C, lasting several days (default 6 days).
Phase 2: typically this is a phase in which the temperature reached in
phase 1 is maintained, lasting several days (default 2 days)
Phase 3: this is the second and final cooling ramp to the final temperature
set point for storing the frozen food and, being the most critical phase,
typically lasts longer (default 10 days).
UoM
°C/°F
%
Note: when change set point is enabled and the current set point
is St+r4 (and/or Sth +r5), the SET button flashes to indicate that
the control set point is not the value indicated by parameter St or StH.
Note: if the second row of the display shows the set point (/t2 =
6, on models where featured), the value displayed will be the
effective control set point (therefore, either St or St + r4, depending on
the status of the digital input)
6.3.2
Set point variation by time band
With UltraCella, the control set point can also be changed based on time
bands, using the RTC fitted on the device. The function is similar to the
one described in the previous paragraph, however this is more useful
when needing to change the set point repeatedly at fixed times.
When the time band is active, the control set point will be the sum of the
values of parameters St and r4.
Par.
PS1
PS2
PS3
PH1
PH2
PH3
• Time band not active -> control set point = St or StH
• Time band active -> control set point = St + r4 or StH + r5
Par.
r4
r5
Description
Set point offset
Humidity set point offset
Def
3.0
0.0
Min Max
-60
60
-50.0 50.0
Set point ramps
UoM
°C/°F
%
Description
Ramps: final set point, phase 1
Ramps: final set point, phase 2
Ramps: final set point, phase 3
Ramps: duration of phase 1
Ramps: duration of phase 2
Ramps: duration of phase 3
Def Min Max
0
-50,0 200,0
0
-50,0 200,0
-30,0 -50,0 200,0
6
0
10
2
0
10
10
0
10
UoM
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F
days
days
days
Example: ramp starting from an ambient temperature of 30°C, the first
phase reaches 0°C in 6 days (phase 1), maintained at 0°C for 2 days (phase
2) and final cooling ramp to the set point of -30°C over 10 days (phase 3).
To activate set point variation by time band, a time band needs to be
enabled by setting the following parameters:
REFRIGERATION CURVE FOR COLD ROOMS
30 °C
hSn
MSn
hSF
MSF
H9
Description
Def
0
Set point variation by time band: day
0 = disable
1, 2, …7 = Sunday, Monday, … Saturday
8 = Monday to Friday
9 = Monday to Saturday
10 = Saturday & Sunday
11 = every day
Start set point variation by time band: 0
hours
Start set point variation by time band: 0
minutes
End set point variation by time band: 0
hours
End set point variation by time band: 0
minutes
Enable set point variation by time band
0
0/1=disabled/enabled
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
Min
0
Max
11
UoM
days
20 °C
internal temperature
Par.
dSn
2,5 K /12 h
10 °C
48 hours
at 0°C
0 °C
1,5 K /12 h
-10 °C
0
23
hours
-20 °C
0
59
min
-30 °C
0
23
hours
0
59
min
0
1
-
0d
00
h
1d
00
h
2d
00
h
3d
h
00
4d
00
h
5d
00
h
6d
00
h
i
7d
00
f
h
8d
h
00
9d
0h
h
00
10
d0
0h
11
d0
12
d0
0h
13
d0
0h
0h
14
d0
0h
15
d0
0h
16
d0
0h
17
d0
d
18
h
00
f
Note: when the ramps are active, and throughout their duration,
the control set point is no longer the value indicated by parameter
St, but is automatically recalculated, depending on the values set for
parameters PSi and PHi, every 12 hours.
46
ENG
6.4 Pump down
Note: in the event of a blackout when a ramp is in progress, when
power returns, the ramp resumes from where it was interrupted if
the temperature in the cold room during the blackout has not increased
by a value greater than parameter Pdt from the set point reached just
before the blackout
• if (set point before blackout – current cold room temperature) ≤
Pdt -> brief blackout -> resume ramp from the phase where it was
interrupted, with a new starting set point equal to the temperature
reached by the cold room, and the phase lasts the remaining duration
(as if the blackout had not occurred);
• if (set point before blackout – current cold room temperature) > Pdt
-> extended black-out, the temperature has increased too much ->
restart the ramp from the beginning (phase 1, PS1, PH1).
This aims to avoid damage to the floor due to an excessively fast pull
down.
Par.
Pdt
Description
Ramps: maximum set point variation
after blackout
Def
20,0
Min
10,0
Max
30,0
The pump down has the aim to completely empty the evaporator of the
refrigerant at each stop of the compressor. After this phase, you can safely
turn off the compressor, so that the liquid is not present the next time the
compressor is started. When the set point is reached, the control closes
the pump down valve to stop the flow of refrigerant to the evaporator,
and, after a certain time, the compressor. In the application diagram
there are the pump down valve and the low pressure switch. When the
control requires turning on the compressor, if the safety periods c1 and
c2 have passed, the pump down valve is opened and after the time set in
parameter c8 the compressor is activated.
Par. Description
Def
c7
Maximum pump down time (PD)
0
0 = Pump down disabled.
c8
Compressor start delay after opening of 5
pump down valve PD
H1 AUX1 output configuration
1
…5 = pump down valve
H5 AUX2 output configuration
1
…5 = pump down valve
UoM
°C/°F
Note: At the end of the third phase, the control set point returns
to the value set for parameter St -> to avoid abrupt variations, it is
recommended to set PS3 = St.
Min
0
Max
900
UoM
s
0
60
s
0
17
-
0
17
-
C
CMP
L
Enable ramps
The ramps need to be enabled by setting parameter Pon=1
Par.
Pon
Description
Enable set point ramps
1 = ramps enabled
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
F
UoM
-
P
S
1. Set Pon=1;
2. The evaporator fans are activated for 3 minutes (fan relay ON and
T V2
analogue output at the maximum value corresponding to parameter
F6, if enabled);
3. Initial ramp set point = Sv (virtual control probe, which coincides
with the current cold room temperature);
4. The controller adjusts the control set point based on parameters PS1,
PS2, PS3 and PH1, PH2, PH3. During each phase, the control set point
is recalculated every 12 hours;
5. At the end of the phase (duration PH3), the ramps are automatically
disabled (Pon=0) and the control set point is once again the value
of St.
PDV
E
M
Fig. 6.d
Key
CMP
C
L
P
F
E
S
V2
PDV
Note: when the ramps are enabled, and throughout their
duration, the SET button flashes to indicate that the control set
point is no longer the value set for parameter St.
Note: if the second row of the display shows the set point (/t2 =
6, on models where featured), the value displayed will be the
effective control set point.
Compressor
Condenser
Liquid receiver
Low pressure switch
Dehydrator filter
Evaporator
Liquid indicator
Thermostatic expansion valves
Pump down valve
Note: time c8 is ignored when pump down is disabled (c7=0). In
this case, the pump down valve (H1=5 or H5=5) can be used to
control a solenoid valve, whose operation always matches the compressor
output. c8 is also ignored when pump down is enabled (c7>0) and the
compressor OFF time is 0 (c2= 0).
Note: to restart the ramps, reset Pon=1
Note: the ramps are always disabled if set point variation from
digital input / time band is active
You can select the pump down:
• on pressure (pressure switch mandatory): once the pump down
valve closes, the compressor continues to operate until reaching the
low pressure value (contact opened). At this point the compressor is
turned off. If the pressure switch does not change within the time c7,
alarm “Pd” triggers, pump down ended due to time-out. The Pd alarm
is reset automatically if in the next pump down low pressure is reached
within the time c7.
• on time (pressure switch optional): after the valve closes, the
compressor operates for the time c7. The ‘Pd’ alarm, Pump down ended
by time-out, is deactivated.
Note: the ramps can be activated even when UltraCella is OFF
Note: to skip a specific phase of the ramp, set PHi=0 (i=1, 2 or 3)
47
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
c10 = 0: Pressure pump down
ON
Pressure switch changes within c7 Pressure switch changes after c7
CMP, FAN
ON
OFF
CMP, FAN
ON
OFF
VPD
ON
OFF
PDV
ON
Pressure
switch
OFF
ON
OFF
Pressure
switch
ON
OFF
AtS
ON
OFF
Alarm Pd
Sv
OFF
St
Sv
St
t
c7
Fig. 6.g
c7
Fig. 6.e
Note: low pressure = pressure off/open.
Fig. 6.f
Key
Key
CMP, FAN
PDV
Pressure switch
Sv
c7
Pd
t
St
CMP, FAN
VPD
St
Sv
Compressor, fan
pump down valve
Pressure switch
Virtual probe
Pump down maximum time
Pump down alarm
Time
Set point
Compressor, fan
Pump down valve
Set point
Control probe
t
AtS
Pressure switch
Time
Autostart in pump down
Pressure switch
Notes:
• at compressor autostart, the safety times c1 and c2, not c3 are
Note:
respected;
• the message “AtS” is reset automatically on the next correct pump
• if during the pump down there is a new demand for cooling, the pump
down cycle.
down procedure terminates, and the pump down valve is opened (the
compressor is already on from the previous pump down phase);
• in case of “Pd” alarm the auto-start function is disabled.
6.6 Continuous cycle
To activate the continuous cycle by keyboard see Chapter 3 (parameter
value cc> 0). During operation in a continuous cycle, the compressor
continues to operate regardless the control, for the time “cc”, to lower the
temperature even below the set point. The continuous cycle is stopped
after the time cc or when reaching the minimum specified temperature,
corresponding to the minimum temperature alarm threshold (AL). If,
after the end of the continuous cycle, the temperature falls below the
minimum temperature threshold, the low temperature alarm signal can
be ignored by suitably setting the c6 parameter: the alarm bypass delay
time after continuous cycle.
6.5 Autostart in pump down
As seen in the previous paragraph, once you reach the set point, the
control closes the pump down valve and then the pressure switch
changes and signals low pressure. If, due to problems of sealing of
the valve, the pressure switch changes again, you can reactivate the
compressor with the Auto start function, signalled by the message “Ats”.
This message is erased on the next correct pump down cycle
Par.
c9
Description
Autostart in pump down
0 whenever pump down valve
closes
1 whenever pump down valve
closes & every request of
low pressure switch without
regulation request
Def
0
Min
0
Max UoM
1
-
Par.
cc
c6
A5
A9
Description
Continuous cycle duration
Low temperature alarm delay after
continuous cycle
Digital input configuration 2 (DI2)
…
14 = Continuous cycle activation
Digital input configuration 3 (DI3)
…
14 = Continuous cycle activation
6.7 Door switch control
See chap. 4
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
48
Def
0
2
Min
0
0
Max
15
250
UoM
hour
hour
0
0
15
-
0
0
15
-
ENG
6.8 Defrost
Sd
Introduction
These parameters (dd1…dd8) can be used to set up to 8 defrost events
linked to the system clock (RTC)
Par.
dd1…8
hh1…8
nn1…8
Description
Defrost 1…8: day
0
Disabled
1…7 Monday…Sunday
8
From Monday to Friday
9
From Monday to Saturday
10 Saturday and Sunday
11 Daily
Defrost 1…8: hour
Defrost 1…8: minute
Def
0
Min
0
Max
11
dt1
dt1-1
UoM
t
ON
OFF
0
0
0
0
23
59
t
hour
min.
DEF
OFF
Fig. 6.h
Key
t
dt1
dP1
Sd
d0
DEF
Note: Ed1 and Ed2 alarms can be disabled by A8 parameter.
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
UoM
-
dt1
dt2
dP1
dP2
d6
Description
Type of defrost
0 Heater by temperature
1 Hot gas by temperature
2 Heater by time
3 Hot gas by time
End defrost temperature, main
evaporator
End defrost temperature, auxiliary
evaporator
Maximum defrost duration
Maximum defrost duration, auxiliary
evaporator
Terminal display during defrost
0 = Temperature alternated with dEF
1 = Last temperature shown before
defrost
2 = dEF
Def
0
Min
0
Max
3
Time
End of defrost temperature
Maximum defrost duration
Defrost Probe
Type of defrost
Defrost
1. electric heater defrost (d0 = 0, 2): operating cycle.
The operating cycle refers to default values of the parameters F2 and F3.
The end of the defrost cycle can be by temperature, and in this case it is
necessary to install the defrost probe Sd (to select between B2 and B3) or
by time. In the first case the defrost ends if the probe Sd measures a value
greater than the value of dt1 or dP1 time has elapsed, in the second case
if the defrosting phase exceeds the maximum time dP1. At the end of
the defrost the controller can enter in dripping status (present if dd> 0),
in which the compressor and the fans are turned off, and subsequently in
the state of post-dripping (if present Fd> 0), in which the control resumes
with fans off. You can choose the display on the user terminal during
defrost, using parameter d6.
Par.
d0
C
CMP
L
F
UoM
-
S
PDV
T V2
M
4
-50
200
°C/°F
4
-50
200
°C/°F
30
30
1
1
250
250
min
min
1
0
2
-
t
dP1
Note: Ed1 and Ed2 indicate that the defrost ended due to timeout.
Description
Ed1, Ed2 enable
0/1= disabled/enabled
d0=2, 3
ON
UltraCella allows you to manage the following types of defrost, depending
on parameter d0:
0. electric heater defrost by temperature (placed near the evaporator);
1. hot gas defrost by temperature.
2. electric heater defrost by time;
3. hot gas defrost by time.
Par.
A8
d0=0, 1
DEF
B3
E
Fig. 6.i
REFRIG PUMP
DOWN
DEF
(REF)
ON
DRIP
(dd)
POST
DRIP
(Fd)
REFRIG
c8
CMP
OFF
ON
PDV
OFF
ON
FAN
OFF
F0=0
F3=1
ON
RES
OFF
t
Fig. 6.j
Key
49
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
CMP
Refrig
PDV
Pump down
FAN
Def
RES
Drip
E
Post drip
C
V2
F
t
B3
L
S
Key
Compressor
Refrigeration
Pump down valve
Pump down phase
Evaporator fan
Defrost
Resistance (defrost heater)
Drip
Evaporator
Post drip
Condenser
Thermostatic expansion valve
Dehydrator filter
Time
Defrost probe
Liquid receiver
Liquid indicator
CMP
Refrig
FAN
Def
V_def
Drip
E
Post drip
C
B3
V2
L
F
S
t
The defrost is activated, upon priority:
• from keyboard, using the defrost key;
• from clock, setting the event and the starting mode, with maximum 8
defrosts a day (parameters dd1...dd8);
• setting the cyclic range “dI”;
• from digital input;
• from supervisor.
Note:
• in pump-down the fan activation is determined by F0;
• in defrost the fan activation is determined by F3.
2. hot gas defrost (d0 = 1, 3): operating cycle.
The operating cycle refers to default values of the parameters F2 and F3.
C
The defrost is disabled:
• defrost by temperature: when the defrost probe detects a temperature
greater than the defrost end temperature dt1;
• defrost by time: in the absence of the defrost probe, the defrost ends
after the maximum time set by parameter dP1.
V_def
M
Compressor
Refrigeration
Evaporator fan
Defrost
Hot gas valve
Drip
Evaporator
Post drip
Condenser
Defrost probe
Thermostatic expansion valve
Liquid receiver
Dehydrator filter
Liquid indicator
Time
CMP
L
6.8.1
Maximum period of time between consecutive
defrosts
F
Par. Description
dI
Maximum interval between
consecutive defrosts
0 = defrost not performed
S
T V2
B3
E
Fig. 6.k
DEF
(hot gas)
DRIP
Min
0
Max
250
UoM
hour
The parameter dI is a security parameter that allows cyclical defrosts
every “dI” hours even in the absence of the Real Time Clock (RTC). At the
beginning of each defrost cycle, regardless of duration, a count is started.
If the dl time is exceeded without performing any defrost, the defrost is
automatically activated. The counter remains active even if the controller
is off.
Note: the defrost output (DEF) is used for command of the hot
gas valve V_def.
REFRIG
Def
8
POST
DRIP
Example: in case of failure for example at RTC the scheduled defrost by
td3 (= dd3, hh3, nn3) is not made, after the safety time dI starts a new
defrost.
REFRIG
dl
ON
ON
c8
CMP
DEF
OFF
OFF
dd2
FAN
OFF
t
dd1
ON
F0=0
dd3
F3=1
Fig. 6.m
Key
ON
V_def
dI
dd1…dd3
DEF
t
OFF
t
Maximum interval of time between consecutive defrosts
Scheduled defrosts
Defrost
Time
Note:
Fig. 6.l
• if the interval dI expires when the controller is OFF, when it is started
again a defrost is performed;
• to ensure regular defrosts, the interval between defrosts must be
greater than the maximum defrost duration, plus the dripping time
and post-dripping time;
• if setting dl=0 the defrost is performed only if activated from keyboard
or by setting the scheduled defrosts (ddi).
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
50
ENG
6.8.2
Par.
d3
d4
d5
d8
dpr
Other defrost parameters
Description
Defrost activation delay
Defrost at start-up
0/1=No/Yes
Defrost delay at start-up
High temperature alarm delay after
defrost (and door open)
Defrost priority over continuos cycle
0/1=No/Yes
Def
0
0
Min
0
0
Max
250
1
UoM
min
-
0
1
0
0
250
250
min
hour
0
0
1
-
Par. Description
F0
Evaporator fan management
0 = always on with compressor on
1= activation depends on Sd, Sv
3= activation based on Sd
4= always on (independent of the
compressor)
5= activation with temperature /
humidity control
F1
Fan activation temperature
F2
Fan activation time with CMP off
F3
Evaporator fans during defrost
0/1=on/off
• d3 determines the time that must elapse, when the defrost is activated,
between the stopping of the compressor (electric heater defrost) or
the starting of the compressor (hot gas defrost), and the activation of
the defrost relays on the main and auxiliary evaporators. In the hot gas
defrost, the delay d3 is useful for ensuring a sufficient amount of hot
gas before activation of the hot gas valve;
• d4 determines whether to activate or not the defrost at the controller
start-up. The defrost at start-up request has priority over the activation
of the compressor and the continuous cycle. Force a defrost at
controller start-up may be useful in special situations.
Def
0
Min
0
Max
2
UoM
-
5
30
1
-50
0
0
200
60
1
°C/°F
min
-
If the fan is off, it can be controlled by a PWM signal that has a duty cycle
with a fixed period Tp of 60 min
duty_cycle = F2
60
The fan can be switched off in the following situations:
• when the compressor is off (parameter F2);
• during defrosting (parameter F3).
Example: frequent power drops inside the plant. In case of lack of voltage
the tool resets the inner clock that calculates the period of time between
two defrosts, starting from zero. If, in an extreme case, the frequency of
the power failure were greater than the defrost frequency (e.g. a power
failure every 8 hours, against a defrost every 10 hours) the controller
would never perform a defrost. In a situation of this type, it is preferable
to activate defrost on start-up, above all if the defrost is controlled by
temperature (probe on the evaporator), therefore avoiding unnecessary
defrosts or at least reducing the running times. In the case of systems
with a large number of units, if selecting defrosts at start-up, after a power
failure all the units will start defrosting, thus causing a voltage overload.
This can cause power overload. To overcome this, the parameter d5 can
be used. It adds a delay before the defrost, and this delay must obviously
be different for each unit.
• d5 represents the time that elapses between the start of the controller
and the start of the defrost at start-up;
• dd is used to force the stop of the compressor and the evaporator fan
after a defrost cycle in order to facilitate the evaporator dripping;
• d8 indicates the time of exclusion of the high temperature alarm
signalling from the end of a defrost;
• if dpr = 0, the defrost and the cycle have the same priority; if dpr = 1,
if the continuous cycle is in progress and a defrost request intervenes,
the continuous cycle ends and the defrost starts.
F0=0
The fan is always on when the compressor is on
Fig. 6.n
F0=1
The fan is activated based on the evaporator temperature, and the value
of the virtual probe Sv, using the formula:
if Sd ≤ (Sv - F1) -Frd --> FAN = ON
if Sd ≥ (Sv - F1) --> FAN = OFF
6.9 Evaporator Fans
6.9.1
Fixed speed fans
The status of the fans depends on the compressor status.
When the compressor is:
• on: the fan can also be on (F0=0) or activated based on the evaporator
temperature, virtual probe Sv, based on the formula:
if Sd ≤ (Sv - F1) -Frd --> FAN = ON
if Sd ≥ (Sv - F1)
--> FAN = OFF
Fig. 6.o
• off: the fan is controlled by a PWM that has duty cycle with a fixed
period of 60 minutes.
F0=3
The fan is activated based on the evaporator temperature only, using the
formula:
if Sd ≤ F1 -Frd --> FAN = ON
if Sd ≥ F1 --> FAN = OFF
duty_cycle = F2
60
51
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
6.9.2
Variable speed fans
The installation of variable speed fans may be useful to optimise energy
consumption. In this case, the fans are powered by the mains, while the
control signal is provided by UltraCella by analogue output Y1 0…10 Vdc.
The maximum and minimum fan speed can be set using F6 and F7
parameters (in percentage respect range 0…10V). If using the fan speed
controller, F5 represents the temperature below which the fans are
activated, with a fix hysteresis of 1°C.
Par.
F5
Fig. 6.p
F6
F7
F0=4
The fan is always on, irrespective of compressor status.
Description
Evaporator fans cut-off temperature
(hysteresis 1°C)
Maximum fans speed
Minimum fans speed
Def
15
Min
-50
Max
200
UoM
°C/°F
100
0
F7
0
100
F6
%
%
To enable the algorithm, it’s necessary to select variable speed fans mode
(F0=2) and set analogue output 0…10 Vdc (HO1=2).
Par. Description
F0 Evaporator fan management
…
2 = variable speed fans based on Sd
6 = variable speed fans based on Sd-Sv
7 = variable speed fans based on Sv
HO1 Output Y1 0…10 V configuration
…
2 = variable speed fans regulated on Sd
Fig. 6.q
Def Min Max
0
0
2
0
0
3
UoM
-
-
Note: the behaviour of modulating fans may be affected not only
by the “cooling” demand and temperature control request, but
also by other control functions (dehumidification, humidification and
heating), if present.
F0=5
The fan is on if at least one of the following loads (compressor, heaters /
dehumidifier, humidifier) is on
In order of priority, the following are possible
• If at a certain time the dehumidification function is activated, the fans
will run at a fixed speed - configured by parameter F11 – for the entire
duration of the dehumidification function.
• If at a certain time the heating function is activated, the fans will run at
maximum speed for the entire duration of the heating function.
• If at a certain time the humidification function is activated, the fans
will ensure a minimum speed - configured by parameter F12 – even
when the compressor is off. The fan speed may be higher based on
the logic of F0
• During the “cooling” phase, fan operation normally depends on the
logic of parameter F0
Par.
F11
F12
Description
Fan speed during dehumidification
Minimum fan speed during humidification
Def Min Max UoM
40
0
100 %
10
0
100 %
F0=2
The fan modulates its speed based on the evaporator temperature only,
increasing speed the further Sd is below F1:
Fig. 6.r
Key
CMP
PWM mod.
F1
Frd
Evap.fan
t
Sv
Sd
Compressor
PWM modulation
Fan activation threshold
Fan activation differential
Evaporator fan
Time
Virtual probe
Defrost probe
The fan can be stopped:
• when the compressor is off (parameter F2);
• during defrost (parameter F3).
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
Fig. 6.s
52
ENG
F0=6
The fan modulates its speed based on the evaporator temperature and
room temperature, increasing speed the further Sd is below Sv- F1:
Par.
F8
F10
Description
Fans peak time
0 = function disabled
Evaporator fans forcing time at
maximum speed
0 = function disabled
Def
0
Min
0
Max
240
UoM
s
0
0
240
min
speed fans defined by Sd
F6
F7
F8
F8
t
F10
F10
Fig. 6.t
F8
Fig. 6.v
F0=7
The fan modulates its speed based on room temperature, increasing
speed the further Sv is above the set point St:
Note: the periodical cycles at maximum speed (determined by F8
and F10) are not allowed when the cold room door is open.
6.9.3
Evaporator fans during defrost
The evaporator fans can be forced on both during normal control
(parameter F2) and during defrost (parameter F3). During the dripping
time (parameter dd > 0) and post-dripping time (parameter Fd > 0),
the evaporator fans are always off. This is useful to allow the evaporator
to return to operating temperature after defrosting, avoiding the
flow of warm air across the evaporator. The time dd is used to stop
the compressor and the evaporator fan after defrosting, so as to assist
evaporator dripping.
Par.
F2
F3
Fig. 6.u
Fd
F4
Key
Sd
F0
F1
Frd
Evaporator probe
Evaporator fans management
Fan start temperature
Fan activation differential
dd
Description
Fan activation time with CMP off
Evaporator fans during defrost
0/1=on/off
Post dripping time (fans off )
Humidity output during defrost
0/1 = ON/OFF
Dripping time after defrost (fans off )
Def
30
1
Min
0
0
Max
60
1
UoM
min
-
1
1
0
0
30
1
min
-
2
0
30
min
Note:
• If two defrost probes are configured (Sd1 and Sd2), fan speed is
6.10 Condenser fans
calculated in relation to the probe that is measuring the higher
temperature (so as to limit the flow of warm air):
if Sd1>Sd2 –› control on Sd1;
if Sd1<Sd2 –› control on Sd2.
If a probe error occurs, fan speed is fixed at the value set for parameter F6.
• If F0=2 and HO1=2, fan speed is calculated according to the algorithm
in Figure 6.o. In any case, if the speed is greater than 0, the “FAN” relay
DO3 is active (closed):
if speed (Y1) > 0 V –› “FAN” relay ON (DO3 closed)
if speed (Y1) = 0 V –› “FAN” relay OFF (DO3 open)
• If F0=0, 1 (fixed speed fans on “FAN” relay DO3), the analogue output is
fixed at 0 (Y1=0 V)
• Within the modulation range (F1-Frd < Sd < F1), fan speed is modulated
proportionally (e.g.: Sd=F1-Frd/2 –› Y1 corresponds to the percentage
(F6+F7)/2)
Due to motor mechanical inertia, some EC fans cannot start at the
minimum speed set by the parameter F7. To overcome this problem, the
fans can start at the maximum speed set by parameter F6 for a “peak time”,
defined by parameter F8, irrespective of the defrost temperature Sd.
Vice-versa, if the fan operates too a long at low speed, ice may form on
the blades; to avoid this, at intervals of F10 minutes the fan is operated at
maximum speed for the time defined by parameter F8.
With UltraCella, the condenser fans can be managed by one of the
auxiliary relays AUX1/AUX2 (in ON/OFF mode), or by analogue output
Y1 (0 to 10 V).
6.10.1 Fixed speed fans
The condenser fans are activated based on parameters FC4 and A0, after
configuring the digital output AUX.
Par.
FC4
A0
Par.
H1
H5
53
Description
Condenser fan deactivation
temperature
Alarm and fan differential
Def
40
Min
-50
Max UoM
200 °C/°F
2.0
0.1
20
Description
AUX1 output configuration
…
6= condenser fans
AUX2 output configuration
…
6 = condenser fans
Def
0
Min
0
Max
17
0
0
17
°C/°F
UoM
-
-
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
The 0 to 10 V output is activated in direct proportional mode, centred
around the condenser fan control set point FCS and differential FCd.
Sc
FC4+A0
FC4
Par.
FCS
FCd
Description
Def Min Max U.O.M.
Variable speed condenser fans: set point 15,0 -100.0 200,0 °C/°F
Variable speed condenser fans:
2,0 0,1 10,0 °C/°F
differential
t
ON
Example 1: extended output range, 0 to 10 V (FCL=0, FCH=100).
FAN
Analog
output
OFF
t
Max capacity= 100%
FCH
max output
value= 10V
Fig. 6.w
Key
Sc
FAN
FC4
t
A0
FCn
min capacity = 0%
Condenser probe
Condenser fans
Turn off temperature
Time
Differential
FCL
min output
value= 0V
differential
FCd
Note: if an alarm triggers at condenser probe, the output
condenser fan is always on.
Fig. 6.x
In this example, the minimum modulation capacity FCn is 0, therefore the
range of modulation of the 0 to 10 V output is: FCS-FCd < Sc < FCS+FCd.
.
It may be useful to manage the fans at variable speed, in order to optimise
energy consumption. In this case, the fan is powered by the mains, while
the 0 to 10 Vdc control signal is supplied by UltraCella via output Y1.
To activate this mode, the condensing temperature needs to be
determined. This can be done in two ways:
:
• Using an NTC / PT1000 temperature probe connected to input B3 as a
condensing temperature probe (Sc):
/A3 = 2 (Sc)
• Connecting a pressure probe (4 to 20 mA / 0 to 5 Vrat) to input B5 as a
condensing pressure probe (Scp):
/P5 = 0 (4…20mA) / 1 (0…5Vrat)
/A5 = 5 (Scp) -> the pressure value will be converted to a temperature
(Sc) based on the type of refrigerant, defined by setting the parameter
PH:
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
R22
R134a
R404A
R407C
R410A
R507A
R290
R600
R600A
R717
R744
R728
R1270
R417A
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
R422D
R413A
R422A
R423A
R407A
R427A
R245FA
R407F
R32
HTR01
HTR02
R23
R1234yf
R1234ze
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
R455A
R170
R442A
R447A
R448A
R449A
R450A
R452A
R508B
R452B
R513A
R454B
Par.
FCn
Description
Output Y1 configuration
3 = variable speed condenser fans
FCL
Description
Variable speed condenser fans: max.
output value
Variable speed condenser fans: min.
output value
U.O.M.
%
Max capacity= 100%
FCH
output max
value = 10V
Def Min Max U.O.M.
3
1
40
-
FCL
input max
value= 0V
FCn
min capacity= 60%
Set capacity
differential
FCd
differential
FCd
Sc
(condensing
temperature)
FCS
(setpoint)
Fig. 6.y
In this example, the range of modulation of the 0 to 10 V output is:
FCS+0.2*FCd < Sc < FCS+FCd
Example 3: limited output range, 2 to 10 V (FCL=20, FCH=100), minimum
modulation capacity 60%
Def Min Max U.O.M.
0
0
3
-
Analog
output
output max
value = 10V
Def Min Max U.O.M.
100 FCL 100
%
0
0
FCH
max capacity = 100%
FCH
FCn
min capacity = 60%
FCL
%
output min
value= 2V
Set capacity
differential
FCd
differential
FCd
FCS
(setpoint)
Fig. 6.z
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
Def Min Max
0
0 FCH
Analog
output
The maximum and minimum fan speed can be set using parameters FCH
and FCL (as a percentage of the range from 0 to 10 V).
Par.
FCH
Description
Variable speed condenser fans: min.
capacity percentage
Example 2: extended output range, 0 to 10 V (FCL=0, FCH=100), minimum
modulation capacity 60%.
To activate analogue output Y1 for condenser fan control, set parameter
HO1.
Par.
HO1
Sc
(condenser
temperature)
FCS
(setpoint)
6.10.2 Variable speed fans
Par.
PH
differential
FCd
54
Sc
(condensing
temperature)
ENG
In this example, the range of modulation is still
FCS+0,2*FCd < Sc < FCS+FCd
for starting the fans, and
FCS-FCd < Sc < FCS+FCd
for stopping (the fans stop when the condensing temperature is less than
FCS-FCd.
Par. Description
FSL Floating condensing temp. set point:
min value
FSH Floating condensing temp. set point:
max value
FSO Floating condensing temp. set point:
offset
Note: if a condensing temperature/pressure probe error occurs
(E2 for Sc or E4 for Scp), the analogue output will take the
maximum value indicated by parameter FCH, except in the following
events:
• CHt (high condenser temperature alarm, if configured)
• EPM (motor protector alarm, 3PH module, if present and configured)
• EPU (high/low pressure or Kriwan alarm, 3PH module, if present and
configured)
Min
0
-50,0
50,0 °C/°F
OFF
c4
t
15
Fig. 6.ab
Par.
c4
Description
Compressor running time in duty
setting
Def
0
Min
0
Max
100
UoM
min
6.12 Bowl resistance
FSH (max)
The resistor is used to heat the collection tank after the defrosting phase,
to prevent the ice from blocking the passage of water.
The resistance is activated for 3 minutes before the programmed defrost
or simultaneously with a manual defrost. The resistance is always off after
the defrost phase.
FSO
(offset)
FSL (min)
Par.
H1
SA
t
H5
external temperature
Fig. 6.aa
To activate the floating condensing temperature function, as well as
setting FCt=1, B3 (parameter /A3) or B4 (parameter /A4) needs to be
configured as an outside temperature probe (SA).
/A4
5,0
ON
floating set point
Description
Probe 3 configuration
…
4 = out. temp. probe (SA)
Probe 4 configuration
…
1 = out. temp. probe (SA)
200,0 °C/°F
CMP
Max UoM
1 -
The purpose of the floating condensing temperature function is to
lower the condensing temperature based on the outside temperature,
so as to preserve correct compressor operation. The floating condensing
temperature set point algorithm requires an outside temperature probe
(SA), usually located near to the condenser, so as calculate the reference
control value, as shown in the following figure:
Par.
/A3
FSL
In the event the alarm “rE” (virtual control probe fault), the parameter c4 is
used to ensure the operation of the compressor until the fault is resolved.
The compressor cannot be activated according to the temperature (due
to the faulty probe), it is activated cyclically with a time of operation (ON)
equal to the value assigned to c4 and a switch-off time (OFF) fixed at 15
minutes .
The control set point for variable speed condenser fans (parameter FCS)
may be either fixed or variable (floating condensing temperature). The
type of set point is selected using parameter FCt.
Description
Def
Variable speed condenser fans: fixed or 0
variable set point
0/1=fixed FCS/floating
25,0
6.11 Duty setting
6.10.3 Floating condensing temperature set point
Par.
FCt
Def Min Max UoM
5,0 -100,0 FSH °C/°F
Def
0
Min
0
0
0
Def
1
Min
0
1
0
Max UoM
17 -
17
-
6.13 Defrosting with 2 evaporators
You can configure up to 2 defrost probes and up to 2 evaporator outputs.
The control recognizes the configuration based on the following table
(probe 1 is the control probe and cannot be configured)
Max UoM
5 -
4
Description
AUX1 output configuration
…
3 = bowl resistance activation
AUX2 output configuration
…
3 =bowl resistance activation
-
DEFROST PROBES AND EVAPORATORS OUTPUT CONFIGURATION
Case
Note: if the outside temperature probe SA is not configured, or if
the probe has an error (E2 for B3, E3 for B4), the floating condensing
temperature algorithm will be disabled, and the control set point will be
fixed (FCS).
The algorithm allows for the floating condensing temperature set point
to vary between a minimum (parameter FSL) and a maximum (parameter
FSH) and, based on the outside temperature (SA), an offset is added
(parameter FSO). For details on these parameters, see the datasheet for
the condenser used
.
55
1
2
3
Defrost
probes
B2
B2
B2 and B3
Evaporator
outputs
Evap. 1
Evap. 1 and 2
Evap. 1
4
B2 and B3
Evap. 1 and 2
Notes
B2 acts on the evap. 1
B2 acts on the evap. 1
B2 and B3 act on evap. 1 (start
and end of defrost based on the
minimum value probe)
B2 acts on the evap. 1 and B3 act
on evap. 2
Tab. 6.b
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
CASE 4: 2 PROBES AND 2 EVAPORATORS
ON
CP2
C
D
OFF
ON
CP1
CMP
L
D
OFF
F
rd/2
rd/2
Sv
St
S
Fig. 6.ae
Key
T V1
SV
CP1
CP2
rd
t
St
B2
E1
T V2
Virtual probe
Compressor 1
Compressor 2
Differential
time
Set point
Operation examples:
B3
(NOTE: REQ1: Sv > St + rd/2; REQ2: Sv > St + rd)
Example 1
E2
ON
REQ1
Fig. 6.ac
OFF
Key
E1/2
C
V1/2
L
B2/B3
CMP
F
S
t
Evaporator 1/2
Condenser
Thermostatic expansion valve 1/2
Liquid Receiver
defrost probe 2, 3
Compressor
Filter drier
Liquid indicator
ON
REQ2
OFF
t
ON
CP1
OFF
Defrosts on two evaporators can be performed either simultaneously or
sequentially; the latter is used above all to limit the power consumption
of the two defrost heaters working at the same time.
Par.
d13
Description
Defrost on two evaporators
(0=Simultaneous - 1=Separate)
Def
0
Min
0
t
ON
CP2
Max UoM
1
-
OFF
t
Fig. 6.af
6.14 Second compressor with rotation
Example 2
Second compressor output with double step control with rotation: the
compressors will be turned on as follows:
• alternately for single step requests (as in example 3)
• the first to be turned on will be the first to be turned off for the 2 steps
requests (as in examples 1, 2 and 4)
Par.
Description
Def
1
H1/H5 AUX1 output configuration/AUX2
14 = second compressor with rotation
management
Min
0
Max
17
ON
REQ1
OFF
t
UoM
-
ON
REQ2
OFF
t
Sv
ON
CP1
St+rd
OFF
St+rd/2
St
t
ON
t
CP2
ON
CP1
OFF
OFF
t
t
Fig. 6.ag
ON
CP2
OFF
t
Fig. 6.ad
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
56
ENG
Example 3
Par.
H1
ON
REQ1
OFF
H5
t
ON
REQ2
OFF
Description
AUX1 output configuration
…
16 = output in reverse mode for
control with dead band
AUX2 output configuration
…
16 = output in reverse mode for
control with dead band
Def
1
Min
0
1
0
Max UoM
17 -
17
-
The figure shown below refers to heating/cooling control with dead
band for a compressor (direct) with one capacity step.
t
ON
CP1
OFF
t
ON
CP2
OFF
t
Fig. 6.ah
t
Example 4
Fig. 6.aj
ON
REQ1
The following figure, on the other hand, refers to heating/cooling control
with dead band for a compressor with two capacity steps.
OFF
t
ON
REQ2
OFF
t
ON
CP1
OFF
t
Fig. 6.ak
ON
CP2
Note: the second compressor step (with or without rotation) and
control with dead band both refer to the auxiliary outputs (AUX1/
AUX2). If both are enabled, configure, for example H1 = 14 (AUX1 second
compressor step) and H5 = 16 (AUX2 output in reverse mode (heating)
with dead band)
OFF
t
Fig. 6.ai
Key
REQ1
REQ2
t
CP1
CP2
In the same way, auxiliary outputs AUX1 / AUX2 can be used for dead band
control with two-step compressor and heaters, in this case configuring:
• H1=16 reverse output with dead band
• H5 = 21 reverse output 2
request 1
request 2
time
compressor 1
compressor 2
6.15 Control with dead band
6.16 AUX output activation by time band
As well as the control output in direct mode (cooling, compressor), on
UltraCella one of the two auxiliary outputs (AUX1/AUX2) can be selected
in reverse mode (heating, by electric heater / other actuators). This type of
control features an area in which the selected output is not active, called
the dead band (parameter rn). Parameter rr represents the differential for
the output in reverse mode.
With UltraCella, auxiliary outputs AUX1/AUX2 can also be activated by
time band, , using the RTC fitted on the device.
When the time band is active, the AUX output (H1 for AUX1, H5 for AUX2)
configured will be active (ON, relay closed).
• Time band not active -> AUX output not active (OFF, relay open)
• Time band active -> AUX output active (ON, relay closed)
Par.
rn
rr
Par.
H1
Description
Dead band
Differential for control with dead band
Def
0
2,0
Min
0
0,1
Max UoM
60 °C/°F
20 °C/°F
To activate heating/cooling control with dead band, set:
• rn > 0
• H1 = 16 (for AUX1) or H5 = 16 (for AUX2)
H5
57
Description
AUX1 output configuration
…
17 = output managed by time band
AUX2 output configuration
…
17 = output managed by time band
Def
1
Min
0
1
0
Max UoM
17 -
17
-
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
To activate an auxiliary output by time band, a time band needs to be
enabled by setting the following parameters:
Par.
don
hon
Mon
hoF
MoF
H8
Description
AUX activation by time band: day
0 = disable
1, 2, …7 = Sunday, Monday, …
Saturday
8 = Monday to Friday
9 = Monday to Saturday
10 = Saturday & Sunday
11 = every day
AUX activation by time band: hours
AUX activation by time band: minutes
AUX deactivation by time band: hours
AUX deactivation by time band: minutes
Enable AUX activation by time band
0/1=disabled/enabled
Def
0
Min
0
6.17 Humidity management
UltraCella can interact with CAREL humidification systems, managing the
humidity level in combination with cooling control.
The humidity must be read from UltraCella, configuring an analogue
input (B4 or B5) as a 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA input for humidity probes.
The controller can display the humidity read by the probe and, by suitably
configuring one of the auxiliary outputs, AUX1 or AUX2, activate an
external CAREL humidifier to adjust the humidity level accordingly.
Max UoM
11 days
Carel Humidification systems are compatible with UltraCella
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
23
59
23
59
1
hours
min
hours
min
-
Example: to activate auxiliary output AUX1 from Monday to Friday, from
07:30 to 20:00, set:
• H1 = 17;
• don = 8;
• hon = 7;
• Mon = 30;
• hoF = 20;
• MoF = 0;
• H8 = 1 -> if H8=0 the time band will never be active
humiSonic
mc multizone
humiDisk
Fig. 6.al
Note: the auxiliary output is activated based on the time band
even when UltraCella is OFF
Note: lthe status of the AUX output (if configured as active by
time band) is also retained after a blackout
Wiring diagram between UltraCella and humiSonic
VL
GND
GND
Rx/Tx+
Rx/TxGND
humiSonic
48 47 46 45 44 43
31
49 50 51 52 53 54
Rx/Tx+
Rx/TxGND
Rx/Tx+
Rx/TxGND
FieldBus BMS
42
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
B3
B2
B1
Y1
B4
B5
GND
5 VREF
+ Vdc
DI1
DI2
DI3
CAREL NTC, PT1000
CAREL NTC, PT1000
CAREL NTC, PT1000
analog output (0 to 10 Vdc)
CAREL NTC, analog input 0 to 10 Vdc
0 to 5 Vdc
OUT B5 analog input
M (4 to 20 mA)
+V
(**)
DI1
Door switch
18
24 Vac
UltraCella Control
R6
EN60730-1
250 V
UL 873
R5 - R6
12 (10) A
12 A res. 2HP
12FLA 72 LRA
R5
17
16
15
14
DEF
13
12
EN60730-1
250 V
UL 873
R3 - R4
10 A res.
5 (3) A
10 A res. 5FLA
18 LRA
R4
R3
R2
11
FAN
(4)
(1) RS485
Supervisione
Supervision
10
9
LIGHT
GND Tx Rx
8
7
EN60730-1
250 V
UL 873
R1 - R2
8 (4) A N.O.
8 A res. 2FLA
12 LRA
6
R1
5
4
3
2
1
230 V
20 A max
Fig. 6.am
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
58
ON/OFF
ENG
Basic humidity control logic: if the humidity measured is less than the
set point StH, the relay activates the externally connected humidifier
(REVERSE action, standard ON/OFF with differential).
6.17.1 Analogue input configuration for humidity
probes
Either analogue input B4 or B5 needs to be configured a humidity probe
input.
Par.
/P4
/P5
Par.
/A4
/A5
Description
B4 configuration
…
2 = 0 to10V
B5 configuration
…
0 = 4 to 20mA
Description
B4 configuration
…
2 = humidity probe (Su)
B5 configuration
…
1 = humidity probe (Su)
Def
0
Min
0
Max
2
UoM
-
0
0
1
-
Humidity output
AUX1/AUX2
ON
OFF
B5
rdH
Def
0
Min
0
Max
4
StH
UoM
-
Fig. 6.an
Key
0
0
5
StH
rdH
B5
-
Par.
StH
rdH
Example:
Humidity probe with 0 to 10 V output -> connect the probe to input B4
and set
• /P4=2
• /A4=2
Humidity set point
Humidity differential
Probe B5 configured as 4 to 20 mA humidity probe
Description
Humidity set point
Humidity differential
Def
90.0
5.0
Min Max
0.0 100.0
0.1 20.0
UoM
%rH
%rH
Note:
1. Humidity control can be disabled during defrosting (parameter F4):
• F4=0 -> humidity control enabled based on humidity set point
Humidity probe with 4 to 20 mA output -> connect the probe to input
B5 and set
• /P5=0
• /A5=1
StH;
• F4=1 -> humidity control not enabled: during defrost, the
external humidifier will not be activated.
2. Humidifier activation (AUX1/AUX2 relay) is always disabled in the
event of an alarm that immediately stops the compressor. Examples:
• CHT alarm;
• LP alarm (after 3 times);
• IA alarm (when A6=0).
6.17.2 Display humidity reading on UltraCella
On models with single row display, P/Ns WB000S*, the humidity can be
displayed instead of the cold room temperature, selecting:
• Humidity probe with 0 to 10 V output -> /t1=10 (B4)
• Humidity probe with 4 to 20 mA output -> /t1 = 11 (B5)
Par.
/t1
Description
Variable 1 on the display
…
10 = B4
11 = B5
Def
1
Min
0
Max
13
Par.
F4
UoM
-
Description
Humidifier relay during defrost
0 = relay enabled in defrost (based
on StH)
1 = relay not enabled in defrost
Def
1
Min
0
Max
1
UoM
-
6.18 Dehumidification
On models with double row display, P/Ns WB000D*, the humidity can
be displayed on the second row as the second process selecting:
• Humidity probe with 0 to 10 V output -> /t2=10 (B4)
• Humidity probe with 4 to 20 mA output -> /t2 = 11 (B5)
Par.
/t2
Description
Variable 2 on the display (second row)
…
Def
6
Min
0
Max
23
Using the same configuration of the probes as described in the previous
paragraph, UltraCella can also manage dehumidification:
UoM
-
10 = B4
11 = B5
6.17.3 AUX1 / AUX2 auxiliary output configuration
and basic humidity control logic
Fig. 6.ao
To activate the humidifier connected to UltraCella, configure one of the
auxiliary outputs AUX1 or AUX2 for humidity control.
Par.
H1
H5
Description
AUX1 output configuration
…
15 = humidity output
AUX2 output configuration
…
15 = humidity output
Def
1
Min
0
Max
17
UoM
-
1
0
17
-
or humidity control with dead band:
Fig. 6.ap
59
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
Case 2: Humidity control within a range
Dehumidification requires simultaneous cooling (compressor) and
heating (heater). The cooling effect is to reduce the air’s relative humidity,
while the heater offsets excessive cooling, keeping a virtually constant
temperature in the cold room throughout the process.
For example, relay AUX2 can be used to enable the heaters, setting H5=12
to exploit the dehumidification logic.
Note: a stand-alone external dehumidifier can also be used; in
this case, the operating logic is completely separate from the
compressor’s. The function can be configured by setting H1 or H1 or H5
= 20.
Fig. 6.ar
Humidity is controlled in a sequence of cycles, ensuring the temperature
always remains inside the range 1°C – 8°C
Note: activation of one of the auxiliary relays for dehumidification
automatically enables dead band temperature control with rn=1
For humidity control with dead band, the humidifier also needs to be
connected to relay AUX1, setting parameter H1=15
Case 3: Humidity control with upper temperature limit
Note: activation of one of the two auxiliary relays for
dehumidification and the other for humidification, automatically
enables dead band humidity control with rnH=5 (as well as dead band
temperature control, as described above)
The control parameters are as follows:
Par.
StH
rdH
rrH
rnH
TLL
Description
Humidity set point
Humidity differential
Dehumidification differential
Humidity dead band
Minimum temperature to enable humidity
control
THL Maximum temperature to enable humidity
control
TdL Temp. differential to enable humidity control
r5
Humidity set point offset
Def Min Max UoM
90.0 0.0 100.0 %rH
5.0 0.1 20.0 %rH
5.0 0.0 50.0 %
5.0 0.0 50.0 %
0.0 -60.0 60.0 °C/°F
This configuration, if the heater is oversized, prevents the temperature
from exceeding the limit of 20°C during dehumidification.
0.0 -60.0 60.0 °C/°F
Case 4: Humidity control with lower temperature limit
Fig. 6.as
0.0 0.0 20.0 °C/°F
0.0 -50.0 50.0 %
6.18.4 Simultaneous humidity and temperature
control
When both values are controlled simultaneously, generally humidity
control is independent of temperature control.
Humidity control can be bound within a defined temperature range
(parameters TLL and THL and the corresponding differential TdL), so as to
avoid excessive temperature deviations during humidity control.
Fig. 6.at
This configuration is used to stop humidification below -0.5°C (for
example, fresh fruit storage with humidification)
Note: in the event of humidity probe errors (for example B5)
humidification and dehumidification are managed in “duty
cycles”. This is only possible in humidification-only and dehumidificationonly modes, are not in humidity control with dead band.
Note: if parameters TLL and / or THL are 0, they are ignored by the
control logic
Case 1: Humidityy control independent of temperature (default)
Par. Description
U1 Humidity control duty cycle ON time
U2 Humidity control duty cycle OFF time
Fig. 6.aq
Temperature is controlled only after the humidity set point has been
reached
Fig. 6.au
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
60
Def Min Max UoM
10
0
120 min
60
0
120 min
ENG
6.19 Generic functions
AS2
/A3
/A4
/A5
Description
Probe 2 configuration
3 = generic temperature probe 2
Probe 3 configuration
5 = generic temperature probe 3
Probe 4 configuration
3 = generic temperature probe 4
4 = generic humidity probe 4
Probe 5 configuration
2 = generic temperature probe 5
3 = generic humidity probe 5
4 = generic pressure probe 5
Def
0
Min
0
Max
3
UoM
-
0
0
5
-
0
0
4
-
0
0
5
-
A9
Description
Configuration of digital input DI2
15 = alarm from generic function
Configuration of digital input DI3
15 = alarm from generic function
Def
0
Min
0
Max
15
U.o.M
-
0
0
15
-
14
-
0
0
1
-
0,0
rS2
ON/OFF control 2: differential
2,0
r2S
-50,0 200,0 °C/°F/
0,0 100,0 rH%/
-20,0 999 bar/
psi
0,1 20,0 °C/°F/
rH%/
bar/
psi
To enable the function, set AS1/AS2 to a value greater than 0. To use
outputs AUX1/AUX2 for generic ON/OFF functions, set parameters H1/
H5.
The generic alarm functions can be associated with an alarm already
featured on UltraCella (for example CHt, high condenser temperature
alarm, or LP, low pressure alarm), or to digital inputs D12/DI3, which
therefore need to be configured specifically.
Par.
A5
0
SS2
With UltraCella, a number of generic functions can be configured, and
associated with configurable inputs and outputs that have not already
been configured for other uses.
The following functions are available:
• 3 ON/OFF control functions, using outputs AUX1/AUX2 (AUX3 / AUX4
see paragraph 6.20)
• 1 modulating control function, using output Y1 (0 to 10 V)
• 2 alarms, using outputs AUX1/AUX2 (AUX3 / AUX4 see paragraph 6.20)
The generic ON/OFF or 0 to 10 V modulating control functions can be
associated with an input that also has other functions (for example Sv,
control probe, or Su, humidity probe), or to a free input that therefore
needs to be configured specifically.
Par.
/A2
3
ON/OFF control 2: control variable
configuration
0
Sm
8 generic temperature
probe 2
1
Sd1
9 generic temperature
probe 3
2
Sr
10 generic temperature
probe 4
3
Sv
11 generic temperature
probe 5
4
Sd2 12 generic humidity
probe 4
5
Sc
13 generic humidity
probe 5
6
SA
14 generic pressure
probe 5
7
Su
ON/OFF control 2: mode
0/1=direct/reverse
ON/OFF control 2: set point
Par.
H1
H5
Description
Def
AUX1 output configuration
0
8 = Generic ON/OFF control function 1
9 = Generic ON/OFF control function 2
AUX2 output configuration
0
8 = Generic ON/OFF control function 1
9 = Generic ON/OFF control function 2
Min
0
Max
17
U.o.M
-
0
17
-
6.19.5 ON/OFF control functions
UltraCella can manage 3 ON/OFF control functions in direct or reverse
mode, based on a configurable set point and differential. The control
variable is defined by parameter AS1 (AS2).
Par.
AS1
SS1
Description
Def
ON/OFF control 1: control variable 3
configuration
0
Sm
8 generic temperature
probe 2
1 Sd1
9 generic temperature
probe 3
2
Sr
10 generic temperature
probe 4
3
Sv
11 generic temperature
probe 5
4 Sd2 12 generic humidity
probe 4
5
Sc
13 generic humidity
probe 5
6
SA
14 generic pressure
probe 5
7
Su
ON/OFF control 1: mode
0
0/1=direct/reverse
ON/OFF control 1: set point
0,0
rS1
ON/OFF control 1: differential
r1S
2,0
Min
0
Max
14
UoM
-
Fig. 6.av
0
1
For each ON/OFF control function, two alarm absolute thresholds and an
alarm notification delay can be set.
-
-50,0 200,0 °C/°F/
0,0 100,0 rH%/
-20,0 999 bar/
psi
0,1 20,0 °C/°F/
rH%/
bar/
psi
61
Par.
AL1
Description
Def
ON/OFF control 1: absolute low 0,0
alarm threshold
AH1
ON/OFF control 1: absolute high
alarm threshold
0
Ad1
AL2
ON/OFF control 1: alarm delay
ON/OFF control 2: absolute low
alarm threshold
0
0,0
Min
-50.0
0.0
-20.0
-50.0
0.0
-20.0
0
-50.0
0.0
-20.0
Max
200.0
100.0
999
200.0
100.0
999
250
200.0
100.0
999
U.o.M
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
min
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
Par.
AH2
Description
Def
ON/OFF control 2: absolute high 0
alarm threshold
Ad2
ON/OFF control 2: alarm delay
Min
-50.0
0.0
-20.0
0
0
Max U.o.M
200.0 °C/°F/
100.0 rH%/
999 bar/psi
250 min
Par.
rM1
The following alarms are generated by the functions:
• GL1,GL2: alarms when exceeding low thresholds AL1, AL2
• GH1, GH2: alarms when exceeding high thresholds AH1, AH2
Description
Def
Modulating control: modulation range, 2,0
between min SL1 and max SH1
Min
0,1
Max
40,0
UoM
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/
psi
The maximum and minimum values can be set using parameters SH1
and SL1 (cut-off ), as a percentage of the range from 0 to 10 V..
Example 1: ON/OFF control 1 based on pressure (input B5, 4 to 20 mA)
with direct action via AUX1. Control set point 15 bars, differential 3 bars.
Set:
• /P5 = 0 -> input B5 to 4 to 20 mA
• /A5 = 4 -> generic pressure probe 5
• AS1 = 14 -> generic pressure probe 5
• r1S = 0 -> direct action
• SS1 = 15 -> control set point 15 bars
• rS1 = 3 -> differential 3 bars
• H1 = 8 -> output AUX1 for ON/OFF control 1
Par.
SL1
SH1
Description
Def Min Max UoM
Modulating control: min. modulating 0,0
0,0 SH1
%
output value (cut-off )
Modulating control: max. modulating 100,0 SL1 100,0
%
output value
To enable the function, set AM1 to a value greater than 0. To use the
0 to 10 V analogue output Y1 for the generic modulating function, set
parameter HO1.
Par.
HO1
Example 2: ON/OFF control 2 based on humidity (input B4, 0 to 10 V) with
reverse action on AUX2. Control set point 75% rH, differential 10% rH.
Set:
• /P4 = 2 -> input B4 to 0 to 10 V
• /A4 = 4 -> generic humidity probe 4
• AS2 = 12 -> generic humidity probe 4
• r2S = 1 -> reverse action
• SS2 = 75 -> control set point 75% rH
• rS2 = 10 -> differential 10% rH
• H5 = 9 -> output AUX2 for ON/OFF control 2
Description
Configuration of output Y1
1 = modulating output 1 (generic
function)
SH1= MAX
Note: the third generic ON/OFF control function can be
configured by setting parameter AS3 in the same way as for AS1/
AS2 (see the parameter table). If all three generic functions available are
used, outputs AUX3 (parameter H13) and AUX4 (parameter H14) can also
be used, suitably re-configuring the relays on UltraCella (see paragraph
6.20 for further information)
Def
0
Min
0
Max
3
UoM
-
direct modulation (r1M= 0)
SL1= MIN
(cut-off )
regulation variable
rc1
rM1
Fig. 6.aw
6.19.6 Modulating control
UltraCella can manage a modulating control function using a 0 to 10 V
analogue output with direct or reverse action and settable control set
point and differential. The control variable is defined by parameter AM1,
the control range by parameter rM1.
Par.
AM1
r1M
SM1
rc1
Description
Modulating control: control variable
configuration
0
Sm 8 generic temperature
probe 2
1 Sd1 9 generic temperature
probe 3
2
Sr 10 generic temperature
probe 4
3
Sv 11 generic temperature
probe 5
4 Sd2 12 generic humidity
probe 4
5
Sc 13 generic humidity
probe 5
6
SA 14 generic pressure
probe 5
7
Su
Modulating control: mode
0/1=direct/reverse
Modulating control: set point
Modulating control: differential
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
Def
3
Min
0
Max
14
reverse modulation (r1M= 1)
SH1= MAX
SL1= MIN
(cut-off )
UoM
-
regulation variable
rM1
rc1
SM1
Fig. 6.ax
Also for modulating control, two alarm absolute thresholds and an alarm
notification delay can be set.
0
0,0
2,0
0
1
-
-50,0 200,0 °C/°F/
0,0 100,0 rH%/
bar/
-20,0 999
psi
0,1 20,0 °C/°F/
rH%/
bar/
psi
Par.
AL3
Description
Def
Modulating control: absolute low 0,0
alarm threshold
AH3
Modulating control: absolute
high alarm threshold
Ad3
Modulating control: alarm delay
0,0
0
Min
-50.0
0.0
-20.0
-50.0
0.0
-20.0
0
The following alarms are generated by the functions:
• GL3: alarm when exceeding low threshold AL3
• GH3: alarm when exceeding high threshold AH3
62
Max
UoM
200.0 °C/°F/
100.0 rH%/
999 bar/psi
200.0 °C/°F/
100.0 rH%/
999 bar/psi
250 min
ENG
Example: 0 to 10 V modulating control based on pressure (input B5, 4
to 20 mA) with direct action, control set point 10 bars, differential 1 bar,
modulation range 8 bars, minimum output 2 V, maximum output 8 V.
Set:
• /P5 = 0 -> input B5 to 4 to 20 mA
• /A5 = 4 -> generic pressure probe 5
• AM1 = 14 -> generic pressure probe 5
• r1M = 0 -> direct action
• SM1 = 10 -> control set point 10 bars
• rc1 = 1 -> differential 1 bar
• rM1 = 8 -> modulation range 8 bars
• SL1 = 20,0 -> minimum output 2 V
• SH1 = 80,0 -> maximum output 8 V
• HO1 = 1 -> 0 to 10 V output Y1 for generic modulating function
Par.
A5
A9
Par.
H1
H5
If the generic alarm is associated with digital input DI2 (for AA1) or DI3
(for AA2), the operating logic can be selected (normally open/normally
closed):
Min
0
Max
11
Ad4
AA2
Alarm 2: select source
UoM
-
Ad5
0
0
15
-
Description
AUX1 output configuration
10 = generic alarm 1 (GA1)
11 = generic alarm 2 (GA2)
AUX2 output configuration
10 = generic alarm 1 (GA1)
11 = generic alarm 2 (GA2)
Def
0
Min
0
Max
17
UoM
-
0
0
17
-
For example, if the cold room light does not need to be managed from
the panel, as it is already managed centrally or by an external control, the
corresponding output (relay) R3 can be used for a different function, for
example to control heaters in the collection pan.
The configuration is performed in two steps:
1. Configure the generic function corresponding to the output (relay)
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
250
11
Par. Description
H15 Output R1 configuration
0 compressor
1 defrost
2 fan
3 light
4 AUX1
5 AUX2
6 AUX3
7 AUX4
H16 Output R2 configuration - see H15
H17 Output R3 configuration - see H15
H18 Output R4 configuration - see H15
H19 Output R5 configuration - see H15
H20 Output R6 configuration - see H15
-
min
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
r2A
DI3 (with A9=15)
Virtual probe (Sv) fault (rE)
Probe S1 (Sm) fault (E0)
Probe S2 fault (E1)
Probe S3 fault (E2)
Probe S4 fault (E3)
Probe S5 fault (E4)
Low pressure alarm (LP)
Immediate external alarm (IA)
Low temperature alarm (LO)
High temperature alarm (HI)
High condenser temperature
alarm (CHt)
Alarm 2: logic
0/1=normally open/normally
closed
Alarm 2: delay
UoM
-
On UltraCella, the functions associated with the 6 physical outputs (relays)
can be configured so as to adapt to the needs of most installations.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
r1A
DI2 (with A5=15)
Virtual probe (Sv) fault (rE)
Probe S1 (Sm) fault (E0)
Probe S2 fault (E1)
Probe S3 fault (E2)
Probe S4 fault (E3)
Probe S5 fault (E4)
Low pressure alarm (LP)
Immediate external alarm (IA)
Low temperature alarm (LO)
High temperature alarm (HI)
High condenser temperature
alarm (CHt)
Alarm 1: logic
0/1=normally open/normally
closed
Alarm 1: delay
Def
0
Max
15
6.20 Output configuration
• r1A (r2A) = 0 -> N.O. logic -> alarm if DI2 (DI3) is closed (active)
• r1A (r2A) = 1 -> N.C.logic -> alarm if DI2 (DI3) is open (not active)
Description
Min
0
Example: AUX1 active for alarm from digital input DI3 with N.C. logic,
delay 15 minutes.
Set:
• AA2 = 0 -> Alarm 2 associated with digital input DI3
• r2A = 1 -> N.C. logic
• Ad5 = 15 -> delay 15 minutes
• A9 = 15 -> DI3 for alarm from generic function
• H1 = 11 -> AUX1 for generic alarm 2
UltraCella can manage up to two generic alarms, associated with alarms
that are already featured (for example CHt, high condenser temperature
alarm, or LP, low pressure alarm), or to digital inputs D12/DI3, which
therefore need to be specifically configured. The source of the alarm is
defined by parameter AA1 (AA2), the notification delay by parameter Ad4
(Ad5).
Alarm 1: select source
Def
0
To use outputs AUX1/AUX2 for the generic alarms, set parameters H1/H5.
6.19.7 Generic alarms
Par.
AA1
Description
Digital input 2 configuration (DI2)
15 = alarm from generic function
Digital input 3 configuration (DI3)
15 = alarm from generic function
Def
5
4
3
2
1
0
Min Max UoM
0
7
-
0
0
0
0
0
7
7
7
7
7
-
2. Configure the specific function corresponding to the output (AUX1AUX4) selected in the previous step
Par. Description
0
0
1
0
0
250
Def
H15 AUX1 output configuration
0 Normally energised alarm
1 Normally de-energised alarm
2 Activate from AUX button or DI
3 Activate collection pan heater
4 Auxiliary evaporator defrost
5 Pump down valve
6 Condenser fan
7 Delayed compressor
8 Control output 1 ON/OFF
9 Control output 2 ON/OFF
10 Alarm output 1
11 Alarm output 2
12 Do not select
13 Second compressor step
14 Second compressor step with rotation
-
min
The following alarms are generated by the functions:
• GA1: alarm relating to function AA1
• GA2: alarm relating to function AA2
To associate the generic alarm to a digital input, DI2 or DI3, set parameter
A5 or A9.
63
1
Min Max UoM
0
21
-
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
Par. Description
H1
Def
AUX1 output configuration
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
6.20.8 Smooth Lines
Min Max UoM
1
0
21
-
The Smooth Lines function requires UltraCella to be connected to an
EVD module to control an electronic valve. The purpose is to constantly
modulate refrigerant flow to the evaporator so as to keep the temperature
inside the cold room as constant as possible and avoid frequent
compressor on/off cycles. The result is better product preservation in the
cold room and considerable energy savings compared to traditional ON/
OFF control.
1
2
2
0
0
0
21
21
21
-
The following parameters are used:
Humidity output
Reverse mode output
Output managed by time band
Control output 3 ON/OFF
Reverse output - dehumidification
External dehumidifier
Reverse mode output 2
H5 AUX2 output configuration - see H1
H13 AUX3 output configuration - see H1
H14 AUX4 output configuration - see H1
Par.
PLt
PHS
PSP
PSI
PSd
PSM
Note: the UltraCella relays have different ratings (max current
permitted) and some of these are already powered at 230 V:
always check the relay’s rating and power supply in relation to the load
being controlled.
Note: if the AUX3 and AUX4 functions are used, their status
(function active or inactive) is indicated by the LEDs on the UP
and DOWN arrows. The UP and DOWN arrow buttons do not activate the
AUX3 and AUX4 functions (unlike in the case of AUX1 and AUX2)
Description
Stop smooth lines offset
Maximum smooth lines offset
Smooth lines proportional coefficient
Smooth lines integral time
Smooth lines derivative time
Enable smooth lines (0=NO - 1=YES)
Def Min Max
2.0 0.0 10.0
15.0 0.0 50.0
5.0 0.0 100.0
120
0 1200
0
0
100
0
0
1
UoM
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F
s
s
/
To enable the Smooth lines function, access the EVD EVO menu, enable
the EVD module and set PSM =1
The function works as follows:
When the temperature reaches the set point + half of the differential
('ST + rd / 2'), control does not stop, rather a PID algorithm increases the
superheat set point in order to modulate the expansion valve opening.
This special algorithm works until the temperature exceeds the value 'ST
- PLt', when "Smooth lines active" is set to 1.
AUX 3
When the Smooth lines function is active, the algorithm tells the
supervisor, if connected, whether UltraCella is operating within a certain
margin, in other words, whether the suction pressure set point on the
corresponding line can be increased without having a negative impact
on control (if the average set point is greater than P3 + THS, calculated
inside the time frame FSt)
AUX 4
If the average set point is greater than P3 + TSH, the Smooth Lines status
is set to 0, allowing the suction pressure to be increased.
Fig. 6.ay
Fig. 6.az
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
64
ENG
7. PARAMETERS TABLE
Type of variable: A = analogue, I = integer, D = digital
Par. Description
Def
Min
Max
UOM
Type CAREL SVP Modbus R/W
SVP
page
4
4
4
4
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9
9
9
9
9
100
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
12
13
14
15
16
17
51
52
53
54
55
56
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
37
37
37
37
37
44
0
0
1
-
I
18
57
R/W
38
0
0
1
-
I
19
58
R/W
38
0
0
1
-
D
19
8
R/W
38
1
0
13
-
I
67
106
R/W
38
57
6
0
24
-
I
68
107
R/W
38
57
0
0
2
-
I
20
59
R/W
34
1
0
3
-
I
21
60
R/W
34
0
0
5
-
I
22
61
R/W
34
0
0
2
-
I
23
62
R/W
34
57
0
0
4
-
I
24
63
R/W
34
57
0
0
2
-
I
25
64
R/W
34
57
0
0
5
-
I
26
65
R/W
34
57
Pro
/21
/22
/23
/24
/25
/4
/5t
/5P
/6
/t1
/t2
/P
/A2
/A3
/P4
/A4
/P5
/A5
Probe measurement stability probe 1
Probe measurement stability probe 2
Probe measurement stability probe 3
Probe measurement stability probe 4
Probe measurement stability probe 5
Virtual probe composition
0 = probe B1
100= probe B2
Temperature unit of measure
0/1 = °C / °F
Pressure unit of measure
0/1 = bar/psi
Display decimal point
0/1 = yes/no
Display variable 1
0
None
7
1
Virtual probe (Sv)
8
2
Outlet probe (Sm)
9
3
Intake probe (Sr)
10
4
Defrost probe 1 (Sd1)
11
5
Defrost probe 2 (Sd2)
12
6
Set point
13
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
Condenser probe (Sc)
Variable speed condenser fans
set point
Display variable 2 (*)
0
None
13 Superheat (EVO)
1
Virtual probe (Sv)
14 Valve opening % (EVO)
2
Outlet probe (Sm)
15 Valve opening in steps (EVO)
3
Intake probe (Sr)
16 Condenser probe (Sc)
4
Defrost probe 1 (Sd1)
17 Probe U1 (3ph mod.)
5
Defrost probe 2 (Sd2)
18 Probe U2 (3ph mod.)
6
Set point
19 Probe U3 (3ph mod.)
7
B1
20 Variable condenser speed set
8
B2
point (Y1)
9
B3
21 Superheat (EVDice))
10 B4
22 Valve opening % (EVDice)
11 B5
23 Valve opening in steps (EVDice)
12 rd
24 Humidity set point
(*) can be viewed only on UltraCella Sevice Terminal or on the controller
with double row display
Type B1 to B3
0
NTC Standard range -50T90°C
1
NTC extended range 0T150°C
2
PT1000
B2 configuration
0
Absent
1
Defrost probe 1 (Sd1)
2
Intake probe (Sr)
3
Generic function on probe 2
B3 configuration
0
Absent
1
Defrost probe 2 (Sd2)
2
Condenser probe (Sc)
3
Defrost probe 1 (Sd1)
4
Ambient temperature probe (SA)
5
Generic function on probe 3
B4 type
0
NTC Standard range -50T90°C
1
NTC Extended range 0T150°C
2
0 to 10 V
B4 configuration
0
Absent
1
Ambient temperature probe (SA)
2
Humidity probe
3
Probe 4 generic temperature
4
Probe 4 generic humidity
B5 type
0
4 … 20 mA
1
0 … 5 Vrat
2
0.5 … 4.5 Vrat
B5 configuration
0
Absent
1
Humidity probe
2
Probe 5 generic temperature
3
Probe 5 generic humidity
4
Probe 5 generic pressure
5
Scp (Condensing pressure probe)
65
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
Par.
Description
/4L
/4H
/5L
/5H
/C1
/C2
/C3
/C4
Probe 4 minimum value
Probe 4 maximum value
Probe 5 minimum value
Probe 5 maximum value
Offset B1
Offset B2
Offset B3
Offset B4
/C5
Offset B5
Def
Min
Max
0
100
0
100
0
0
0
0
-50.0
/4L
-50.0
/5L
-20.0
-20.0
-20.0
-20.0
/4H
200
/5H
999
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
0
-20.0
20.0
0
2.0
-50.0
60.0
0
r1
0.1
-50.0
r1
0
r2
20
r2
200
1
0
2,0
3
90.0
5.0
0
0
-30.0
6
2
10
20.0
0
0
0,1
60
0.0
0.1
-50.0
-50.0
-50.0
0
0
0
10.0
0
0
6
3
3
0
0
2
0
UOM
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F/
%rH
°C/°F/
%rH/
bar/psi
Type CAREL SVP Modbus
SVP
A
98
208
A
99
209
A
100
210
A
101
211
A
7
0
A
8
1
A
9
2
A
10
3
R/W
page
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
A
11
4
R/W
34
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F
-
A
A
A
A
D
12
13
14
15
11
5
6
7
8
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
44
44
44
44
44
60
20
60
100.0
20.0
200.0
200.0
-200.0
10
10
10
30.0
1
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F
%rH
%rH
°C/°F
°C/°F
days
days
days
°C/°F
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
D
80
81
82
28
29
77
78
79
102
103
104
106
159
190
191
192
19
20
187
188
189
212
213
214
216
48
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
55
55
45
58
58
45
45
45
45
45
45
46
46
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
30
15
15
100
15
250
900
min
min
min
min
min
hours
hours
s
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
43
37
37
37
53
47
47
46
5
0
0
0
60
1
s
-
I
D
39
13
78
2
R/W
R/W
46
47
0
0
1
-
D
12
1
R/W
47
4
40.0
100
0
0
15.0
2.0
0
0
-50.0
FCL
0
0
-100.0
0.1
0
250
200.0
100
FCH
FCH
200.0
10.0
1
s
°C/°F
%
%
%
°C/°F
°C/°F
-
I
A
A
A
A
A
A
D
40
16
131
132
133
134
135
167
79
9
241
242
243
244
245
56
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
43
52
52
52
52
52
52
53
25.0
5.0
5.0
FSL
-100.0
-50.0
200.0
FSH
50.0
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F
A
A
A
136
137
138
246
247
248
R/W
R/W
R/W
53
53
53
0
0
3
-
I
41
80
R/W
36
48
CtL
St
rd
r1
r2
r3
rn
rr
r4
StH
rdH
PS1
PS2
PS3
PH1
PH2
PH3
Pdt
Pon
Set point
Differential
Minimum set point
Maximum set point
Operating mode
0
direct with defrost
1
direct without defrost
Dead band
Differential for control with dead band
Offset set point
Humidity set point
Humidity differential
Ramps: final set point, phase 1
Ramps: final set point, phase 2
Ramps: final set point, phase 3
Ramps: duration of phase 1
Ramps: duration of phase 2
Ramps: duration of phase 3
Ramps: maximum set point variation after blackout
Enable set point ramps
0/1 = ramps disabled/enabled
CMP
c0
c1
c2
c3
c4
cc
c6
c7
c8
c9
c10
c11
FC4
FCH
FCL
FCn
FCS
FCd
FCt
FSH
FSL
FSO
Compressors/fan start delay at power on
Minimum time between compressor starts
Minimum compressor off time
Minimum compressor on time
Compressor running time in duty setting
Continuous cycle duration
Low temperature alarm delay after continuous cycle
Maximum pump down (PD) time
0 = Pump down disabled
Compressor start delay after opening of pump down valve
Autostart in pump down
0/1 = whenever pump down valve closes/ whenever pump down valve
closes & every request of low pressure switch without regulation request
Pump down by time/pressure
0/1 = pressure/ time
Second compressor start delay
Condenser fan deactivation temperature
Variable speed condenser fans: max. output value
Variable speed condenser fans: min. output value
Variable speed condenser fans: min. capacity %
Variable speed condenser fans: set point
Variable speed condenser fans: differential
Variable speed condenser fans: fixed or floating set point
0/1= FCS fixed/floating
Floating condensing temp. set point: max value
Floating condensing temp. set point: min value
Floating condensing temp. set point: offset
dEF
d0
8
0
250
hours
I
42
81
R/W
49
dt1
Type of defrost
0
Heater by temperature
1
Hot gas by temperature
2
Heater by time
3
Hot gas by time
Max interval between consecutive defrosts
0 = defrost not performed
End defrost temperature, main evaporator
4.0
-50.0
200.0
°C/°F
A
17
10
R/W
dt2
dP1
End defrost temperature, auxiliary evaporator
Maximum defrost duration
4.0
30
-50.0
1
200.0
250
°C/°F
min
A
I
18
43
11
82
R/W
R/W
dP2
dd
d3
Maximum defrost duration, auxiliary evaporator
Dripping time after defrost
Defrost activation delay
30
2
0
1
0
0
250
30
250
min
min
min
I
I
I
44
45
46
83
84
85
R/W
R/W
R/W
36
48
48
36
48
45
36
50
dI
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
66
ENG
Par.
Description
dpr
Defrost priority over continuous cycle
0/1 = no/yes
Defrost at start-up
0/1=no/yes
Defrost delay at start-up
Terminal display during defrost
0
Temperature alternated with dEF
1
Last temperature shown before defrost
2
dEF
High temperature alarm delay after defrost (and door open)
Defrost on two evaporators (0=Simultaneous - 1=Separate)
d4
d5
d6
d8
d13
Def
Min
Max
UOM
Type CAREL SVP Modbus R/W
SVP
D
15
4
R/W
page
0
0
1
-
0
0
1
-
D
14
3
R/W
50
0
1
0
0
250
2
min
-
I
I
47
49
86
88
R/W
R/W
50
48
25
1
0
0
0
250
1
hours
/
I
D
48
193
87
63
R/W
R/W
50
36
56
2.0
0.1
20.0
°C/°F
A
19
12
R/W
0
0
1
-
D
16
5
R/W
52
73
73
0.0
-50.0
200.0
°C/°F
A
20
13
R/W
73
0.0
-50.0
200.0
°C/°F
A
21
14
R/W
73
120
0
0
0
250
17
min
-
I
I
50
51
89
90
R/W
R/W
73
50
ALM
A0
Alarm and fan differential
A1
Alarm thresholds (AL, AH) relative to set point or absolute
0/1=relative/absolute
Low temperature alarm threshold
If A1=0, AL=0: alarm disabled
If A1=1, AL=-50: alarm disabled
High temperature alarm threshold
If A1=0, AH=0: alarm disabled
If A1=1, AH=200: alarm disabled
High/low temperature alarm delay
Digital input 2 (DI2) configuration
0 Inactive
9 Do not select
1 Immediate external alarm
10 Do not select
2 Do not select
11 Do not select
3 Enable defrost
12 Activate AUX
4 Start defrost
13 Do not select
5 Door switch (enable A3)
14 Activate continuous cycle
6 Remote ON/OFF
15 Alarm from generic function
7 Change set point
16 Start/stop defrost
8 Low pressure switch
17 Serious alarm
Stop compressor on external alarm
Low pressure (LP) alarm delay
Enable Ed1 and Ed2 alarms
0/1= disabled/enabled alarms
Digital input 3 (DI3) configuration
0 Inactive
9 Do not select
1 Immediate external alarm
10 Do not select
2 Do not select
11 Do not select
3 Enable defrost
12 Activate AUX
4 Start defrost
13 Do not select
5 Door switch (enable A3)
14 Activate continuous cycle
6 Remote ON/OFF
15 Alarm from generic function
7 Change set point
16 Start/stop defrost
8 Low pressure switch
17 Serious alarm
Low pressure alarm delay (LP), compressor running
High temperature condenser alarm threshold
High temperature condenser alarm delay
Absolute low humidity alarm threshold
0= alarm disabled
Absolute high humidity alarm threshold
100= alarm disabled
Humidity alarms AUH, AUL delay
Digital input 1 configuration (DI1)
0 Inactive
9 Do not select
1 Immediate external alarm
10 Do not select
2 Do not select
11 Do not select
3 Enable defrost
12 Activate AUX
4 Start defrost
13 Do not select
5 Door switch (enable A3)
14 Activate continuous cycle
6 Remote ON/OFF
15 Alarm from generic function
7 Change set point
16 Start/stop defrost
8 Low pressure switch
17 Serious alarm
AL
AH
Ad
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
Ac
Acd
ULL
UHL
AdH
A11
35
45
47
58
60
0
1
0
0
0
0
100
250
1
min
min
-
I
I
D
53
54
168
92
93
57
R/W
R/W
R/W
73
36
48
0
0
17
-
I
52
91
R/W
35
45
47
58
60
3
70.0
0
0
0
-50.0
0
0
60
200.0
250
100.0
min
°C/°F
min
%rH
I
A
I
A
55
22
56
84
94
15
95
194
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
74
74
73
100.0
0
100.0
%rH
A
83
193
R/W
73
120
5
0
0
250
17
min
/
A
A
117
176
227
279
R/W
R/W
73
34
35
0
0
2
-
I
174
265
R/W
50
51
5.0
2.0
-50.0
0.1
200.0
20.0
°C/°F
°C/°F
A
A
23
24
16
17
R/W
R/W
50
50
Fan
F0
F1
Frd
Evaporator fan management
0 (ON-OFF) always on
with compressor on
1 (ON-OFF) activation based on
Sd, Sv
2 (MODULATING)
variabile speed based on Sd
3 (ON-OFF) activation based on
Sd
Fan activation temperature
Fan activation differential
4 (ON-OFF) always on
5 (ON-OFF) activation with temp. /
humidity control
6 (MODULATING) variabile speed
fas based on Sd-Sv
7 (MODULATING) variabile speed
fans based on Sv
67
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
Par.
Description
F2
Fan activation time with compressor off
30
0
60
min
F3
Evaporator fan during defrost
0/1= ON/OFF
Post dripping time
Humidity output during defrost
0/1 = ON/OFF
Evaporator fans cut-off temperature (hysteresis 1°C)
Maximum fan speed
Minimum fan speed
Fans peak time
0 = disabled function
Evaporator fans forcing time at maximum speed
0 = disabled function
1
0
1
-
D
17
6
R/W
1
1
0
0
30
1
min
-
I
D
60
71
99
28
R/W
R/W
15
100
0
0
-50
F7
0
0
200
100
F6
240
°C/°F
%
%
s
A
I
I
I
25
58
59
176
18
97
98
175
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
36
51
58
51
51
51
51
0
0
240
min
I
177
176
R/W
51
193
0
1
0
0
0
247
0
21
-
I
I
69
61
108
100
R
R
R/W
38
0
0
1
-
D
21
10
R/W
38
1
0
21
-
I
62
101
R/W
38
43
46
52
53
54
55
56
58
59
61
0
0
255
-
I
70
109
R/W
38
0
0
3
-
I
63
102
R/W
43
51
52
60
0
0
1
-
I
188
180
R/W
18
38
4
0
9
-
A
165
266
R/W
18
2
1
2
-
A
166
267
R/W
18
0
0
2
-
A
167
268
R/W
18
Fd
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F10
Def
Min
Max
UOM
Type CAREL SVP Modbus R/W
SVP
I
57
96
R/W
page
50
51
36
CnF
H0
In
H1
H4
H5
H6
HO1
H7
H10
H11
H12
Serial address
Type of unit
AUX1 output configuration
0 Normally energised alarm
1 Normally de-energised alarm
2 Activate from AUX button or DI
3 Activate collection pan heater
4 Auxiliary evaporator defrost
5 Pump down valve
6 Condenser fan
7 Delayed compressor
8 Control output 1 ON/OFF
9 Control output 2 ON/OFF
10 Alarm output 1
Buzzer
0/1 = enabled/ disabled
AUX2 output configuration
0 Normally energised alarm
1 Normally de-energised alarm
2 Activate from AUX button or DI
3 Activate collection pan heater
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
11
12
13
14
Alarm output 2
Do not select
Second compressor step
Second compressor step with
rotation
Humidity output
Reverse mode output
Output managed by time band
Control output 3 ON/OFF
Reverse output - dehumidification
External dehumidifier
Reverse mode output 2
Alarm output 2
Do not select
Second compressor step
Second compressor step with
rotation
Humidity output
Reverse mode output
Output managed by time band
Control output 3 ON/OFF
Reverse output - dehumidification
External dehumidifier
Reverse mode output 2
4 Auxiliary evaporator defrost
15
5 Pump down valve
16
6 Condenser fan
17
7 Delayed compressor
18
8 Control output 1 ON/OFF
19
9 Control output 2 ON/OFF
20
10 Alarm output 1
21
Terminal keys block configuration
0
all keys enabled
1
Set point modification
2
Defrost
4
8
AUX1 output
16
PRG+SET (menu)
32
AUX2 output
64
ON/OFF management
128
Light management
255
all keys disabled
Output Y1 configuration
0 Not active
1 Modulating output 1 (generic function)
2 Variable speed evaporator fans set on Sd probe
3 Variable speed condenser fans
BMS protocol selection
0= Carel
1= Modbus
BMS baud rate bit/s
0 1200
5 38400
1 2400
6 57600
2 4800
7 76800
3 9600
8 115200
4 19200
9 375000
BMS stop bits
1
1 bit di stop
2
2 di bit di stop
BMS parity
1
odd
2
even
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
68
38
43
46
52
53
54
55
56
58
59
61
ENG
Par.
Description
tr1
First temperature to be recorded
0 No log
1 Sv
2 Sm
3 Sr
4 Sd1
Second temperature to be recorded
0 No log
1 Sv
2 Sm
3 Sr
4 Sd1
Sample time temperature recording
AUX3 output configuration
0 Normally energised alarm
1 Normally de-energised alarm
2 Cannot be selected
3 Activate collection pan heater
tr2
trc
H13
H14
Def
Min
Max
0
0
8
-
0
0
8
-
I
190
182
R/W
29
5
2
2
0
60
21
min
/
I
A
191
168
183
271
R/W
R/W
29
62-64
2
0
21
/
A
169
272
R/W
62-64
Enable HACCP
0/1 = No/Yes
HACCP alarm delay
0
0
1
-
D
22
11
R/W
74
0
0
250
min
I
71
110
R/W
74
Enable data modification
Date/ time change
Action on variation 0Æ1 o 1Æ0
Date/ time: year
Date/ time: month
Date/ time : day of month
Date/ time: hour
Date/ time: minute
Hours/minutes visualization on the second row for models with two rows
display 0/1=no/yes
Defrost i (i=1…8): day
Defrost i (i=1…8): hour
Defrost i (i=1…8): minute
0
0
0
0
1
1
-
D
D
24
25
13
14
R/W
R/W
23
23
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
37
12
31
23
59
1
-
I
I
I
I
I
D
98
99
100
101
102
72
111
112
113
114
115
29
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
23
23
23
23
23
66
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
23
59
11
23
59
23
59
1
days
hours
min
days
hours
min
hours
min
-
I
I
I
A
A
A
A
A
D
103…110 116...123 R/W
111…118 124...131 R/W
119…126 132...139 R/W
105
215
R/W
107
217
R/W
109
219
R/W
108
218
R/W
110
220
R/W
160
49
R/W
48
48
48
56
56
56
56
56
56
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
23
59
23
59
1
days
hours
min
hours
min
-
A
A
A
A
A
D
111
113
115
114
116
161
221
223
225
224
226
50
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
45
45
45
45
45
45
5
0
5
min
I
64
103
R/W
36
30
1
c12
0
240
1
min
-
I
D
65
138
104
45
R/W
R/W
36
35
5
6
7
8
Sd2
Sc
SA
Su
5
6
7
8
Sd2
Sc
SA
Su
11
12
13
14
4 Auxiliary evaporator defrost
5 Pump down valve
6 Condenser fan
7 Delayed compressor
8 Control output 1 ON/OFF
9 Control output 2 ON/OFF
10 Alarm output 1
AUX4 output configuration
0 Normally energised alarm
1 Normally de-energised alarm
2 Cannot be selected
3 Activate collection pan heater
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Auxiliary evaporator defrost
Pump down valve
Condenser fan
Delayed compressor
Control output 1 ON/OFF
Control output 2 ON/OFF
Alarm output 1
11
12
13
14
UOM
Type CAREL SVP Modbus R/W
SVP
I
189
181
R/W
page
29
Alarm output 2
Do not select
Second compressor step
Second compressor step with
rotation
Humidity output
Reverse mode output
Output managed by time band
Control output 3 ON/OFF
Reverse output - dehumidification
External dehumidifier
Reverse mode output 2
Alarm output 2
Do not select
Second compressor step
Second compressor step with
rotation
Humidity output
Reverse mode output
Output managed by time band
Control output 3 ON/OFF
Reverse output - dehumidification
External dehumidifier
Reverse mode output 2
HcP
HCE
Htd
rtC
tcE
tcT
y__
M__
d__
h__
n__
tcL
ddi
hhi
nni
don
hon
Mon
hoF
MoF
H8
dSn
hSn
MSn
hSF
MSF
H9
AUX activation by time band: day
AUX activation by time band: hours
AUX activation by time band: minutes
AUX deactivation by time band: hours
AUX deactivation by time band: minutes
Enable AUX activation by time band
0/1=disabled/enabled
Set point variation by time band: day
Start set point variation by time band: hours
Start set point variation by time band: minutes
End set point variation by time band: hours
End set point variation by time band: minutes
Enable set point variation by time band
0/1=disabled/enabled
doL
c12
d8d
A3
Compressor safety time for door switch
0 = disable door management
Compressor restart time for door switch
Disable door microswitch
0 = door microswitch enabled
1 = door microswitch disabled
69
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
Par.
Description
tLi
A4
Light on with door open
Light management
0 = door switch + light key - 1 = light key
Def
Min
Max
UOM
Type CAREL SVP Modbus R/W
SVP
I
66
105
R/W
D
18
7
R/W
page
120
0
0
0
240
1
min
-
37
37
3
0
14
-
A
119
229
R/W
58
rcP (see chapter 3 the procedure for setting parameters to default values)
GEF
AS1
0
0
1
-
D
162
51
R/W
58
SS1
ON/OFF control 1: control variable configuration
0 Sm
8 probe 2 generic temperature
1 Sd1
9 probe 3 generic temperature
2 Sr
10 probe 4 generic temperature
3 Sv
11 probe 5 generic temperature
4 Sd2
12 probe 4 generic humidity
5 Sc
13 probe 5 generic humidity
6 SA
14 probe 5 generic pressure
7 Su
ON/OFF control 1: mode
0/1=direct/reverse
ON/OFF control 1: set point
0.0
195
R/W
58
2.0
A
87
197
R/W
58
AL1
ON/OFF control 1: absolute low alarm threshold
0.0
89
199
R/W
59
ON/OFF control 1: absolute high alarm threshold
0.0
A
91
201
R/W
59
Ad1
AS2
0
3
A
A
121
120
231
230
R/W
R/W
59
58
0
0
1
-
D
163
52
R/W
58
SS2
ON/OFF control 1: alarm delay
ON/OFF control 2: control variable configuration
0 Sm
8 probe 2 generic temperature
1 Sd1
9 probe 3 generic temperature
2 Sr
10 probe 4 generic temperature
3 Sv
11 probe 5 generic temperature
4 Sd2
12 probe 4 generic humidity
5 Sc
13 probe 5 generic humidity
6 SA
14 probe 5 generic pressure
7 Su
ON/OFF control 2: mode
0/1=direct/reverse
ON/OFF control 2: set point
200.0
100.0
999
200.0
100.0
999
250
14
A
AH1
-50.0
0.0
-200.0
-50.0
0.0
-200.0
0
0
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
min
-
85
ON/OFF control 1: differential
200.0
100.0
999
20.0
A
rS1
-50.0
0.0
-200.0
0.1
0.0
196
R/W
58
2.0
A
88
198
R/W
58
AL2
ON/OFF control 2: absolute low alarm threshold
0.0
90
200
R/W
59
ON/OFF control 2: absolute high alarm threshold
0.0
A
92
202
R/W
59
Ad2
AS3
A
A
122
119
232
229
R/W
R/W
59
58
r3S
SS3
ON/OFF control 2: alarm delay
ON/OFF control 3: control variable configuration
0 Sm
8 probe 2 generic temperature
1 Sd1
9 probe 3 generic temperature
2 Sr
10 probe 4 generic temperature
3 Sv
11 probe 5 generic temperature
4 Sd2
12 probe 4 generic humidity
5 Sc
13 probe 5 generic humidity
6 SA
14 probe 5 generic pressure
7 Su
ON/OFF control 3: mode (0/1= direct/reverse)
ON/OFF control 3: set point
200.0
100.0
999
200.0
100.0
999
250
14
A
AH2
-50.0
0.0
-200.0
-50.0
0.0
-200.0
0
0
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
min
-
86
ON/OFF control 2: differential
200.0
100.0
999
20.0
A
rS2
-50.0
0.0
-200.0
0.1
0
0.0
51
195
R/W
R/W
58
58
2.0
A
87
197
R/W
58
AL6
ON/OFF control 3: absolute low alarm threshold
0.0
89
199
R/W
59
ON/OFF control 3: absolute high alarm threshold
0.0
A
91
201
R/W
59
Ad6
ON/OFF control 3: alarm delay
200.0
100.0
999
200.0
100.0
999
250
A
AH6
-50.0
0.0
-200.0
-50.0
0.0
-200.0
0
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
min
162
85
ON/OFF control 3: differential
1
200.0
100.0
999
20.0
D
A
rS3
0
-50.0
0.0
-200.0
0.1
A
121
231
R/W
59
r1S
r2S
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
0
3
0
70
ENG
Par.
Description
Def
Min
Max
UOM
3
0
14
-
Type CAREL SVP Modbus R/W
SVP
A
123
233
R/W
page
AM1 Modulating control: control variable configuration
0 Sm
8 probe 2 generic temperature
1 Sd1
9 probe 3 generic temperature
2 Sr
10 probe 4 generic temperature
3 Sv
11 probe 5 generic temperature
4 Sd2
12 probe 4 generic humidity
5 Sc
13 probe 5 generic humidity
6 SA
14 probe 5 generic pressure
7 Su
r1M Modulating control: mode
0/1=direct/reverse
SM1 Modulating control: set point
0
0
1
-
D
164
53
R/W
59
0.0
203
R/W
59
2.0
A
94
204
R/W
59
rM1
Modulating control: modulation range, between min SL1 and max SH1
2.0
0.1
40.0
A
95
205
R/W
59
SL1
SH1
AL3
Modulating control: min. modulating output value (cut-off )
Modulating control: max. modulating output value
Modulating control: absolute low alarm threshold
0.0
100.0
0.0
125
124
96
235
234
206
R/W
R/W
R/W
59
59
60
Modulating control: absolute high alarm threshold
A
97
207
R/W
60
Ad3
AA1
Alarm 1: select source
0
0
SH1
100.0
200.0
100.0
999
200.0
100.0
999
250
11
A
A
A
AH3
0.0
SL1
-50.0
0.0
-200.0
-50.0
0.0
-200.0
0
0
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
%
%
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
°C/°F/
rH%/
bar/psi
min
-
93
Modulating control: differential
200.0
100.0
999
20.0
A
rc1
-50.0
0.0
-200.0
0.1
A
A
126
127
236
237
R/W
R/W
60
60
0
0
1
-
D
165
54
R/W
60
0
0
0
0
250
11
min
-
A
A
129
128
239
238
R/W
R/W
60
60
0
0
1
-
D
166
55
R/W
60
0
0
250
min
A
130
240
R/W
60
0
0
1
-
D
70
27
R/W
39
0
0
3
-
I
139
150
R/W
39
12.8
-1
1
-20
-20
1
200
200
22
°C/°F
°C/°F
-
A
A
I
31
30
136
22
21
147
R/W
R/W
R/W
39
39
39
3
1
40
-
I
135
146
R/W
39
r1A
Ad4
AA2
r2A
Ad5
0.0
Modulating control: alarm delay
0 DI2 (with A5=15)
6 Probe S5 fault (E4)
1 Virtual probe (Sv) fault (rE) 7 Low pressure alarm (LP)
2 Probe S1 (Sm) fault (E0)
8 Immediate external alarm (IA)
3 Probe S2 fault (E1)
9 Low temperature alarm (LO)
4 Probe S3 fault (E2)
10 High temperature alarm (HI)
5 Probe S4 fault (E3)
11 High condenser temperature alarm (CHt)
Alarm 1: logic
0/1=normally open/normally closed
Alarm 1: delay
Alarm 2: select source
0 DI3 (with A9=15)
6 Probe S5 fault (E4)
1 Virtual probe (Sv) fault (rE) 7 Low pressure alarm (LP)
2 Probe S1 (Sm) fault (E0)
8 Immediate external alarm (IA)
3 Probe S2 fault (E1)
9 Low temperature alarm (LO)
4 Probe S3 fault (E2)
10 High temperature alarm (HI)
5 Probe S4 fault (E3)
11 High condenser temperature alarm (CHt)
Alarm 2: logic
0/1=normally open/normally closed
Alarm 2: delay
59
EVO
P1
P1t
Enable communication with EVD EVO module
0/1=no/yes
S1 probe type
P1M
P1n
PVt
0
RAZ. 0 to 5 V
1
4 to 20 mA
Max value of S1 probe
Min value of S1 probe
Valve type
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PH
2
3
CAREL EXV
Alco ex4
Alco ex5
Alco ex6
Alco ex7
Alco ex8 330hz CAREL recommended
Alco ex8 500hz Alco specification
Sporlan sei 0.5-11
9 Sporlan ser 1.5-20
10 Sporlan sei 30
11 Sporlan sei 50
Refrigerant type
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R22
R134a
R404A
R407C
R410A
R507A
R290
R600
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
R600A
R717
R744
R728
R1270
R417A
R422D
R413A
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
R422A
R423A
R407A
R427A
R245FA
R407F
R32
HTR01
4 to 20 mA remote
4 to 20 mA external
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Sporlan seh 100
Sporlan seh 175
Danfoss ets 12.5 - 25b
Danfoss ets 50b
Danfoss ets 100b
Danfoss ets 250
Danfoss ets 400
2 CAREL EXV connected
together
20 Sporlan ser(i) g, j, k
21 Danfoss ccm 10-20-30
22 Danfoss ccm 40
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
HTR02
R23
R1234yf
R1234ze
R455A
R170
R442A
R447A
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
R448A
R449A
R450A
R452A
R508B
R452B
R513A
R454B
71
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
Par.
Description
PrE
Main regulation type
P0
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
PL1
PL2
PL3
PM1
PM2
PM3
cP1
Pdd
PSb
PMP
PMu
Pnr
PLt
PHS
PSP
PSI
PSd
PSM
1 centralized cabinet cold room
3 perturbated cabinet cold room
2 self contained cabinet cold room 4 subcritical CO2 cabinet/cold room
EVD Modbus address
Superheat setpoint
Proportional gain
Integral time
Derivative time
LowSH: threshold low superheat
Low Superheat protection integral time
LowSH: low superheat alarm delay
LOP: threshold for low temperature of evaporation
LOP: integral time
LOP: low evaporation temperature alarm delay
MOP: threshold for low temperature of evaporation
MOP: integral time
MOP: low evaporation temperature alarm delay
Open valve startup (percentage)
Post defrost delay, (only for single driver)
Valve position in stand-by
Enable manual positioning
Manual valve positioning
Reset EVD setting 0 -> 1 Reset all EVD parameters
Stop smooth lines offset
Maximum smooth lines offset
Smooth lines proportional coefficient
Smooth lines integral time
Smooth lines derivative time
Enable smooth lines (0=NO - 1=YES)
Def
Min
Max
UOM
Type CAREL SVP Modbus R/W
SVP
I
137
148
R/W
page
2
1
4
-
198
10
15
150
2
3
600
600
-50
600
600
50
600
10
50
10
0
0
0
0
2.0
15.0
5.0
120
0
0
1
-72
0
0
0
-72
0
0
-60
0
0
-60
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
247
324
800
999
800
324
800
999
200
800
999
200
800
999
100
60
100
1
999
1
10.0
50.0
100.0
1200
100
1
K
sec
sec
K
sec
sec
°C/°F
sec
sec
°C/°F
sec
sec
%
min
step
step
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F
s
s
/
I
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
I
A
A
A
D
I
D
A
A
A
A
A
D
134
44
36
148
37
45
38
150
64
39
151
47
40
152
146
147
169
103
162
139
183
184
185
186
187
191
145
35
27
159
28
36
29
161
41
30
162
38
31
163
157
158
174
38
173
46
286
287
288
289
290
62
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
64
64
64
64
64
64
0
0
1
-
D
183
59
R/W
39
1
1
6
(2, 3, 4, 5
& 6 mode
select.
only from
UltraCella
service
pGD)
-
I
196
185
R/W
40
11
3
IC1
1
99
40
K
-
A
I
150
135
255
146
R/W
R/W
40
40
3
1
11
-
I
1
249
R/W
40
15
150
5
15
-50
0
50
20
30
-50
0
0
0
-9
0
-121
0
IC3
0
-121
-121
0
800
999
IP3
800
IC5
800
392
800
392
392
1
sec
°C/°F
sec
°C/°F
sec
°C/°F
sec
°C/°F
°C/°F
-
A
I
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
I
151
171
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
2
256
252
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
250
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
0
0
1
-
D
182
58
R/W
40
0
1
50
99
0
0
1
0
1
0
999
2
100
99
1
step
%
-
I
I
I
I
I
128
195
173
133
184
141
184
254
144
60
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
40
40
40
40
39
40
-1.0
9.3
-121.0
IL1
IH1
392.0
Bar/Psi
Bar/Psi
A
A
203
204
303
304
R/W
R/W
39
ICE
IPE
IrE
IP3
PH
IS1
ICP
Iti
IC1
IC2
IC3
IC4
IC5
IC6
IC7
IC8
IIA
IU1
IU2
IU3
IU4
In1
ICG
IL1
IH1
Enable EVDice communication
0/1 = not enabled/ enabled
1= Multiplexed cabinet/cold room
2= Air-conditioner/chiller with plate heat exchanger
3= Air-conditioner/chiller with tube bundle heat exchanger
4= Air-conditioner/chiller with finned coil heat exchanger
5= Reserved
6= Reserved
Superheat set point
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R22
R134a
R404A
R407C
R410A
R507A
R290
R600
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
R600A
R717
R744
R728
R1270
R417A
R422D
R413A
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
R422A
R423A
R407A
R427A
R245FA
R407F
R32
HTR01
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
HTR02
R23
R1234yf
R1234ze
R455A
R170
R442A
R447A
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
R448A
R449A
R450A
R452A
R508B
R452B
R513A
R454B
S1 probe type
1 1 to 4.2 barg
7 0 to 45 barg
2 0.4 to 9.3 barg
8 1 to 12.8 barg
3 -1 to 9.3 barg
9 0 to 20.7 barg
4 0 to 17.3 barg
10 1.86 to 43.0 barg
5 0.85 to 34.2 barg
11 reserved
6 0 to 34.5 barg
PID: proportional gain
PID: integral time
LowSH protection: threshold
LowSH protection: integral time
LOP protection: threshold
LOP protection: integral time
MOP protection: threshold
MOP protection: integral time
MOP protection: disable threshold
Low suction temperature alarm threshold
Enable operating mode modification
0/1 = enabled/not enabled
Enable manual valve positioning
0/1 = enabled/not enabled
Manual valve position
Valve control steps: 1/2 = 480/960 step
Valve opening at start (evaporator/valve capacity ratio)
Serial address
Enable EVDice regulation
0/1 = not enabled/ enabled
Pressure probe S1: minimum alarm value
Pressure probe S1: maximum alarm value
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
72
ENG
Par.
Description
Def
Min
Max
UOM
Type CAREL SVP Modbus R/W
SVP
page
Ultra 3PH Module commissioning
cH1
3PH module serial address
1
1
247
-
I
185
177
R/W
cH2
3PH module offset serial address
0
0
232
-
I
186
178
R/W
cH3
Type of three phase module
0 = Evaporator - 1 = Full
Sd1 probe connection
0 = in UltraCella -1 = in 3PH module
Sd2 probe connection
0 = in UltraCella -1 = in 3PH module
Sc probe connection
(Full module only)
0 = in UltraCella - 1 = in 3PH module
Enable 3PH mod.
0 = disable - 1 = enable
0
0
1
-
I
187
179
R/W
0
0
1
-
D
130
40
R/W
0
0
1
-
D
131
41
R/W
0
0
1
-
D
132
42
R/W
0
0
1
-
D
133
43
R/W
41
42
5
0
7
/
A
170
273
R/W
63
4
0
7
/
A
171
274
R/W
63
3
0
7
/
A
172
275
R/W
63
2
0
7
/
A
173
276
R/W
63
1
0
7
/
A
174
277
R/W
63
0
0
7
/
A
175
278
R/W
63
90.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1
0.0
0.1
0.0
0.0
-60.0
-60.0
0.0
-50.0
0
100.0
20.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
20.0
50.0
1
%rH
%rH
%
%
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F
%
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
D
28
29
195
196
192
193
194
199
71
19
20
298
299
295
296
297
302
28
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
10
60
40
10
0
0
0
0
120
120
100
100
min
min
%
%
A
A
A
A
197
198
190
191
300
301
293
294
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
58
58
60
60
60
60
60
60
51
58
60
60
52
52
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
23
59
7
23
59
7
23
59
15
7
23
59
day
hour
min
day
hour
min
day
hour
min
day
hour
min
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
96
81
82
83
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
53
38
39
40
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
69
69
69
69
69
69
69
69
69
69
69
69
69
cA1
cA2
cA3
cEn
Out
H15
H16
H17
H18
H19
H20
HUM
StH
rdH
rrH
rnH
TLL
THL
TdL
r5
F4
U1
U2
F11
F12
Output R1 configuration
0 Compressor
1 Defrost
2 Fan
3 Light
Output R2 configuration
0 Compressor
1 Defrost
2 Fan
3 Light
Output R3 configuration
0 Compressor
1 Defrost
2 Fan
3 Light
Output R4 configuration
0 Compressor
1 Defrost
2 Fan
3 Light
Output R5 configuration
0 Compressor
1 Defrost
2 Fan
3 Light
Output R6 configuration
0 Compressor
1 Defrost
2 Fan
3 Light
4
5
6
7
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
4
5
6
7
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
4
5
6
7
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
4
5
6
7
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
4
5
6
7
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
4
5
6
7
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
Humidity set point
Humidity differential
Dehumidification differential
Humidity dead band
Minimum temperature to enable humidity control
Maximum temperature to enable humidity control
Temperature differential to enable humidity control
Humidity set point offset
Humidity output during defrost
0/1 = ON/OFF
Humidity control duty cycle ON time
Humidity control duty cycle OFF time
Fan speed during humidification
Minimum fan speed during humidification
41
42
41
42
41
42
41
42
41
42
41
42
HACCP alarms (MULTIFUNCTION MENU)
HA
HA1
HA2
HAn
HF
Date/time of last HA alarm: day
Date/time of last HA alarm: hour
Date/time of last HA alarm:minute
Date/time of second last HA alarm: day
Date/time of second last HA alarm: hour
Date/time of second last HA alarm:minute
Date/time of third last HA alarm: day
Date/time of third last HA alarm: hour
Date/time of third last HA alarm:minute
Number of HA alarms
Date/time of last HF alarm: day
Date/time of last HF alarm: hour
Date/time of last HF alarm:minute
73
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
Par.
Description
HF1
Date/time of second last HF alarm: day
Date/time of second last HF alarm: hour
Date/time of second last HF alarm:minute
Date/time of third last HF alarm: day
Date/time of third last HF alarm: hour
Date/time of third last HF alarm: minute
Number of HF alarms
Reset HACCP alarms
HF2
HFn
Hcr
Def
Min
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Max
7
23
59
7
23
59
15
1
UOM
Type CAREL SVP Modbus R/W
SVP
day
I
86
43
R
hour
I
87
44
R
min
I
88
45
R
day
I
91
48
R
hour
I
92
49
R
min
I
93
50
R
I
97
54
R
D
23
12
R/W
page
69
69
69
69
69
69
69
69
Tab. 7.a
Variables accessible ONLY via serial connection
Message on the
display
rE
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
LO
HI
IA
dA
Ed1
Ed2
Pd
LP
Ats
dor
Etc
EE
EF
HA
HF
CHT
SHA
LOA
MOA
EEA
LSA
Hit
ES1
ES2
ES3
ES4
bAt
EEE
EIC
EEC
EFU
ECN
ELE
dnL
uPd
EPE
EP0
EP1
EP2
EPn
EPM
EPU
LOG
ALM
SOF
IA1
IA2
IE1
IE2
IE3
IE4
IE5
IE6
IE7
IE8
IEE
ILE
IEC
IEM
Y1
-
Description
Type
Variable type
R/W
Virtual probe fault alarm
Probe 1 fault alarm
Probe 2 fault alarm
Probe 3 fault alarm
Probe 4 fault alarm
Probe 5 fault alarm
Low temperature alarm
High temperature alarm
Immediate external alarm
Delayed external alarm
Defrost timeout alarm, evaporator 1
Defrost timeout alarm, evaporator 2
Pd alarm active
Low pressure alarm
Pump Down autostart alarm
Door open for too long alarm
RTC fault alarm
Control parameter EEPROM alarm
Operating parameter EEPROM alarm
Type HA HACCP alarm
Type HF HACCP alarm
High condenser temperature alarm
Active alarms
EVD EVO - Low superheat protection
EVD EVO - LOP protection
EVD EVO - MOP protection
EVD EVO - Valve motor fault
EVD EVO - Low suction temperature alarm
EVD EVO - High cond. temperature protection activated
EVD EVO - Probe S1 fault
EVD EVO - Probe S2 fault
EVD EVO - Probe S3 EVO fault
EVD EVO - Probe S4 alarm
EVD EVO - Battery discharged or faulty
EVD EVO - Op. and/or parameter EEPROM error
EVD EVO - Valve not closed completely
EVD EVO - Valve closed in emergency
EVD EVO - FW compatibility error (>=5.0)
EVD EVO - Configuration error
EVD EVO offline
Parameter download not successful
Parameter upload not successful
3PH module offline
Probe Sd1 fault 3PH module
Probe Sd2 fault auxiliary evap. 3PH module
Probe Sc fault 3PH module
3PH module configuration error
3PH module motor protector alarm
High/low pressure alarm or Kriwan activated 3PH module
Recorded temperature download not successful
Alarm log download not successful
UltraCella software update not successful
EVD ICE - Probe S1 fault
EVD ICE - Probe S2 fault
EVD ICE - MOP alarm
EVD ICE - LOP alarm
EVD ICE - Low superheat alarm
EVD ICE - Low pressure alarm
EVD ICE - Valve closed in emergency
EVD ICE - Control from digital input if offline
EVD ICE - Ultracap supplied at low voltage or battery low level
EVD ICE - Valve not closed completely
EVD ICE - Op. and/or parameter EEPROM error
EVD ICE offline
EVD ICE – Configuration error
EVD ICE – Alignment error with UltraCella
0 to 10 V analogue output
Virtual probe
Application version
EVD ICE - Probe S1 value
EVD ICE - Probe S2 value
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Status
Status
Info
Status
Status
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
A
A
A
A
A
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
74
CAREL
address
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
62
63
73
75
77
79
81
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
115
116
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
143
144
145
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
185
186
6
26
27
58
59
Modbus
Address
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
44
46
48
50
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
75
76
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
94
95
96
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
123
124
5
6
7
16
17
ENG
Message on the
display
ESA
U1
U2
U3
ISu
ISa
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
di1
di2
di3
do1
do2
do3
do4
do6
do5
off
cc
def
dU4
dU5
-
Description
EVD EVO - Probe S1 value
EVD EVO - Probe S2 value
EVD EVO - Evaporation temperature
EVD EVO - Superheat value
Probe Sd1 value 3PH module
Probe Sd2 value 3PH module
Probe Sc value 3PH module
3PH0 to 10 V analogue output
First variable shown on LED display
Second variable shown on LED display
EVD ICE - Valve position %
EVD ICE - Superheat
EVD ICE - Suction temperature
EVD ICE - Evaporation pressure
EVD ICE - Evaporation temperature
Probe 1 value
Probe 2 value
Probe 3 value
Probe 4 value
Probe 5 value
Digital input 1 status (N.C.)
Digital input 2 status
Digital input 3 status
Compressor relay status
Defrost relay status
Evaporator fan relay status
Light relay status
AUX 2 relay status
AUX 1 relay status
Controller ON/OFF command
Continuous cycle call command
Defrost call command
LIGHT activation command
AUX1 activation command
AUX2 activation command
OFF
Continuous cycle
Defrost
Compressor
Alarm reset
3PH digital input 1 status
3PH digital input 2 status
EVD ICE - Valve position in steps
EVD EVO - Valve position %
EVD EVO - Valve position in steps
EVD EVO - Offset on active SH set (smoothlines)
EVD EVO - Active SH set (smoothlines)
EVD EVO - Average SH set (smoothlines)
EVD EVO - Smooth lines status
EVD EVO - Cooling request
EVD EVO - Smooth lines control active
Compressor 1 status
Fan status
Light status
AUX1 status
-
AUX2 status
AUX3 status
AUX4 status
75
Type
Variable type
R/W
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Status
Status
Status
Status
Command
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
I
I
I
A
A
A
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
CAREL
address
60
61
62
63
65
66
67
68
72
73
143
144
145
146
147
160
161
162
163
164
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
38
64
127
128
168
204
205
200
201
203
194
195
187
196
197
198
199
Status
Status
Status
D
D
D
R
R
R
200
201
202
Modbus
Address
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
83
84
98
99
100
101
102
105
106
107
108
109
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15
16
17
18
19
20
10
11
12
16
21
86
87
62
91
92
111
112
113
129
130
128
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
Tab. 7.b
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
8. SIGNALS AND ALARMS
Example: display after alarms rE and E0.
8.1 Signalling
The signals are messages that appear on the display to notify the user
regarding the performance of control procedures (such as defrost) or
confirmation of controls from keyboard.
Code
-----
Æ
1
Description
It appears at controller start-up
Probe not enabled
Probes
Control
Compressor
Defrost
Alarm
Fan
Configuration
HACCP
Clock
Door and light
Recipes
Generic functions
EVD EVO module
EVDice
Three phases Module 3PH
cc
Ed1
Ed2
On
OFF
AUX
rEc
no
uPd
dnL
bni
r01…r10
MAX
MIN
Op
cLo
EXT
Hcr
VEr
LOG
ALG
1
2
Note: the buzzer is disabled during the wizard on the UltraCella
Service terminal.
8.3 Reset alarms
Alarms with automatic reset automatically reset when the cause that
generated them, for example, after the replacement of a faulty probe,
at the end of the alarm for high temperature, etc. For those with manual
reset it is necessary to first remove the cause that generated them, and
then press the Alarm button for entire restore.
Password
HACCP alarm, HA type
HACCP alarm, HF type
Reset alarms with manual reset
Reset HACCP alarms
Reset temperature monitoring
Continuous cycle
Defrost on evaporator 1 ended by time-out
Defrost on evaporator 2 ended by time-out
Switch ON
Switch OFF
Auxiliary output switch on request
Temperature registration
Operation not executed
Parameters upload
Parameters download
Menu parameters set (bn)
Recipe 1…10
Maximum temperature read
Minimum temperature read
Open
Closed
Exit menu
Reset HACCP alarms
Software release
Temperature recorded download
Alarms recorded download
Example: display and manual restore alarm CHt (condenser high
temperature)
Æ
Å
1
2
1
2
Æ
1
Æ
1
2
2
1
2
Note: the figures refer to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
the display shows the alarm messages on the second row
8.4 HACCP alarms and display
Tab. 8.a
In order to activate monitoring see par 8.6
(HACCP = Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Point).
HACCP can only be activated on the controllers with the RTC option fitted,
and allows control of the operating temperature and the recording of any
anomalies due to power failures or increases in the operating temperature
due to various causes (breakages, severe operating conditions, operator
errors, etc…). There are two types of HACCP events:
• HA alarms, high temperature during operation;
• HF alarms, high temperature after power black out.
The alarm causes the blinking of HACCP icon, the display of the relative
alarm code on the display, storage of the alarm and activation of the
buzzer.
8.2 Alarms
There are two types of alarms:
• system alarms: e.g. Eeprom alarms, communication (interrupted)
alarms, HACCP, high (HI) and low (LO) temperature alarms, high (AUH)
and low (AUL) humidity;
• control alarms: e.g. pump down ended by time-out (Pd), low pressure
(LP).
Example: display after HF error and restore of the alarm condition:
The auxiliary digital outputs AUX1, AUX2 can be configured to signal
the alarm status, as normally energised or normally de-energised. See
chapter 5. The control indicates the alarms triggered due to faults in
the control itself, in the probes or in the network communication. You can
also activate an alarm from external contact, immediate type. See chapter
4. On the display the message “IA” appears and at the same time the bell
icon blinks and the buzzer activates. If more errors occur, they will appear
in sequence on the display.
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
2
Note: the figures refer to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
the display shows the alarm messages on the second row.
Messages that appear during navigation
PAS
HA
HF
rES
1
Note: in order to deactivate the buzzer and the relay alarm press
the Alarm key
Parameters categories
Pro
CtL
CMP
dEF
ALM
Fan
CnF
HcP
rtc
doL
rcP
GEF
EVO
ICE
3PH
2
Æ
Æ
Å
1
76
2
1
2
ENG
8.5 EVD EVO alarms
Display and cancel HACCP alarms
Access the multifunction menu (see chap. 3) and choose HcP. In the
multifunction menu you can see the date and time of the last 3 alarms HA
and HF. After entering the multifunction menu (see previous par.), select
with UP / DOWN the message “HCP”.
Buzzer
Reset
-
ON
ON
Automatic
-
ON
ON
Automatic
EEA
Valve motor fault
-
ON
ON
Automatic
LSA
-
ON
ON
Automatic
-
ON
ON
Automatic
-
ON
ON
Automatic
-
ON
ON
Automatic
-
ON
ON
Automatic
-
ON
ON
Automatic
-
ON
ON
Automatic
-
ON
ON
Automatic
-
ON
ON
Automatic
-
ON
ON
Automatic
-
ON
ON
Automatic
ECn
Low suction temperature
High condensing
temperature protection
activated
Probe S1 fault or range
exceeded alarm
Probe S2 fault or range
exceeded alarm
Probe S3 fault or range
exceeded alarm
Probe S4 fault or range
exceeded alarm
Battery discharged
or faulty or electrical
connection interrupted
Operating and/or
parameter EEPROM error
Valve not closed
completely
Valve closed in
emergency
FW compatibility error
(>=5.0)
Configuration error
-
ON
ON
Automatic
ELE
EVD offline
-
ON
ON
Automatic
ES4
bAt
EEE
EIC
EEC
EFu
Tab. 8.b
8.6 EVDice alarms
If an EVDice driver is connected via Fieldbus, UltraCella will be able to
signal the following alarms, which depend solely on the status of the
driver.
Alarm code
on display
1
2
Æ
2
LOP protection
MOA MOP protection
ES3
Æ
1
LOA
ES2
Example: HA alarm triggered Thursday at 13:17, with detected
temperature of 36.8 °C.
Æ
Automatic
ES1
Each alarm is displayed with scrolling text, which contains the day of
week, hour, minute, and the temperature that caused the alarm. The
buffer in which are saved can contain the data of up to 3 alarms. Once
full, the new alarm will replace the oldest one. Instead, the alarm counters
(HAn, HFn), after reaching 15, they stop.
2
ON
Hit
UoM
-
Procedure:
1. Press Set and then UP/DOWN to display the parameters of the
following table;
2. Press Set to display the alarm date and time;
3. Press Prg until you return to standard display.
4. To cancel all HACCP alarms, change the value of the parameter Hcr
1
ON
1
2
IA1
Probe S1 fault
-
ON ON
Automatic
IA2
Probe S2 fault
-
ON ON
Automatic
IE1
MOP protection
-
ON ON
Automatic
IE2
LOP protection
-
ON ON
Automatic
IE3
Low superheat protection
-
ON ON
Automatic
IE4
-
ON ON
Automatic
-
ON ON
Automatic
-
ON ON
Automatic
-
ON ON
Automatic
-
ON ON
Automatic
-
ON ON
Automatic
ILE
Low suction temperature
alarm
Valve emergency closing
(Ultracap)
Regulation by digital input in
case of offline
Ultracap module powered
with low voltage or low
charge level
Emergency closure is not
completed
Operating and/or parameter
EEPROM error
EVD ICE offline
-
ON ON
Automatic
IEC
Configuration error
-
ON ON
Automatic
IEM
Alignment error with
UltraCella
-
ON ON
Manual
IE5
IE6
Ç
Æ
1
2
IE7
1
2
IE8
ÅÅÅÅÅ
IEE
Note: the figure refers to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the
scrolling message “HACCP Alarms” on the second row.
Reset
Max
15
15
1
-
Buzzer
Min
0
0
0
Low superheat protection
Alarm relay
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SHA
Icon flashing
on display
Description
Date/time of last HA alarm
Date/time of second last HA alarm
Date/time of third last HA alarm
Number of HA alarms
Date/time of last HF alarm
Date/time of second last HF alarm
Date/time of third last HF alarm
Number of HF alarms
HACCP alarms cancelling
Action on variation 0Æ1 o 1Æ0
Alarm relay
Note: the figures refer to the screens on models with single row
display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,
the display shows the alarm messages on the second row
Par.
HA
HA1
HA2
HAn
HF
HF1
HF2
HFn
Hcr
Icon flashing
on display
2
Button flashing
on display
1
Alarm
description
2
Alarm
description
1
Alarm code
on display
Æ
Button flashing
on display
If an Ultra EVD module, P/N WM00E%, is connected by Fieldbus, UltraCella
will be able to signal the following alarms, which only depend on the
status of the EVD EVO controller fitted on the module.
Tab. 8.c
77
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
EPE
3PH Module off -line
Sd1 probe fault (3PH
EP0
module)
Sd2 probe fault (3PH
EP1
module)
Sc probe fault (3PH
EP2
module)
3PH module
EPn
configuration fault
Motor protector alarm
EPM
(3PH module)
High/low pressure
EPU or Kriwan alarm (3PH
module)
Reset
Buzzer
Alarm relay
Icon flashing on
display
Button flashing
on display
Alarm cause
Alarm code on
display
8.7 3PH module alarms
-
ON ON
Automatic
-
ON ON
Automatic
-
ON ON
Automatic
-
ON ON
Automatic
-
ON ON
Automatic
-
ON ON
Manual
-
ON ON
Manual
Tab. 8.d
Defrost ended by timeout
-
HACCP alarm, HA type
-
HACCP alarm, HF type
-
LoG
uPL
dnL
SOF
SHA
LOA
MOA
EEA
LSA
Hit
ES1
ES2
ES3
ES4
-
Download recorded temperature fault
Parameters upload fault
Parameters download fault
Software update fault
EVD EVO - Low superheat protection
EVD EVO - LOP protection
EVD EVO - MOP protection
EVD EVO - Valve motor fault
EVD EVO - Low suction temperature
EVD EVO - High condensing temperature protection activated
EVD EVO - Probe S1 fault or range exceeded alarm
EVD EVO - Probe S2 fault or range exceeded alarm
EVD EVO - Probe S3 fault or range exceeded alarm
EVD EVO - Probe S4 fault or range exceeded alarm
EVD EVO - Battery discharged or faulty or electrical connection
bAt
interrupted
EEE EVD EVO - Operating and/or parameter EEPROM error
EIC EVD EVO - Valve not closed completely
EEC EVD EVO - Valve closed in emergency
EFu EVD EVO - FW compatibility error (>=5.0)
ECn EVD EVO - Configuration error
ELE EVD EVO - EVD offline
ALM Alarm log download log not successful
EPE Off-line 3PH module
-
EP0
-
Sd1 probe fault (3PH module)
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
-
ON ON
ON ON
Condenser fans
Continuous cycle
duty setting(c4) duty setting(c4)
duty setting(c4) duty setting(c4)
-
Defrost
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
autom./man
manual
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
Evaporator
Fans
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Compressor
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
PD valve
Reset
Icon on the
display flashing
Display key
flashing
-
Buzzer
Virtual control probe fault
Probe B1 fault
Probe B2 fault
Probe B3 fault
Probe B4 fault
Probe B5 fault
Low temperature alarm
High temperature alarm
Immediate alarm from external contact
Serious alarm from external contact
Maximum pump down time alarm
Low pressure alarm
Autostart in pump down
High condenser temperature alarm
Door open too long alarm
Real time clock is broken
EEprom error, unit parameters
Eeprom error, operating parameters
Alarm relay
rE
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
LO
HI
IA
SA
Pd
LP
AtS
CHt
dor
Etc
EE
EF
Ed1,
Ed2
HA
HF
Alarm cause
Cod. display
ALARM TABLE
-
-
-
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
duty setting (A6) duty setting(A6) OFF - OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF
- OFF -
manual
manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
End
-
78
by
time
if Sd1
only
ENG
EP1
EP2
EPn
EPM
EPU
AUH
AUL
GH1
GL1
GH2
GL2
GH6
GL6
GH3
GL3
GA1
GA2
IA1
IA2
IE1
IE2
IE3
IE4
IE5
IE6
IE7
IE8
IEE
ILE
IEC
IEM
Sd2 probe fault (3PH module)
Sc probe fault (3PH module)
3PH module configuration fault
Motor protector alarm (3PH module)
High/low pressure or Kriwan alarm (3PH module)
High humidity alarm
Low humidity alarm
High generic alarm (stage 1 ON/OFF – generic function)
Low generic alarm (stage 1 ON/OFF – generic function)
High generic alarm (stage 2 ON/OFF – generic function)
Low generic alarm (stage 2 ON/OFF – generic function)
Generic high alarm (stage 3 ON/OFF - generic func.)
Serious alarm from external contact
High generic alarm (modulating output – generic function)
Low generic alarm (modulating output – generic function)
Generic alarm (alarm 1 – generic function)
Generic alarm (alarm 2 – generic function)
EVD ICE – Probe S1 fault
EVD ICE – Probe S2 fault
EVD ICE – MOP protection
EVD ICE – LOP protection
EVD ICE – Low superheat protection
EVD ICE – low suction temperature alarm
EVD ICE – valve in emergency closing (Ultracap)
EVD ICE – control from dig. input if offline
EVD ICE – Ultracap module powered with low voltage or low
charge level
EVD ICE – incomplete valve closing
EVD ICE – operating and/or parameter EEPROM error
EVD ICE – EVDICE offline
EVD ICE – Configuration error
EVD ICE – Alignment error with UltraCella
-
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
ON ON automatic
-
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
8.8 Alarm parameters
Key
High and low temperature alarm and activation parameters
AL (AH) allows you to determine the activation temperature for low (high)
temperature alarm LO (HI). The set value AL (AH) is always compared with
the value detected by the control probe. The parameter Ad represents
the alarm activation delay in minutes; the low temperature alarm (LO)
activates only if the temperature is lower than threshold AL for period
of time greater than Ad. The thresholds can be relative or absolute,
depending on the value of parameter A1. In the first case (A1=0) the
value AL indicates the deviation regarding the set point and the low
temperature alarm activation point is: set point - AL. If the set point
differs, the activation point will automatically differ. In the second case
(A1=1), the value AL indicates the low temperature alarm threshold. An
active low temperature alarm is indicated via internal buzzer, with the
code LO on display and with the activation of the alarm relay. The same
occurs for high temperature alarm (HI), considering AH instead of AL.
LO
HI
SV
Par
A0
A1
AL
AH
Ad
A6
Description
Alarm and fan differential
Alarms threshold (AL, AH) relative to set
point or absolute
0/1=relative/absolute
Low temperature alarm threshold
If A1= 0, AL=0: alarm disabled
If A1= 1, AL=-50: alarm disabled
High temperature alarm threshold
If A1= 0, AL=0: alarm disabled
If A1= 1, AL=200: alarm disabled
Delay time for low temperature and
high temperature alarms
Stop compressor from external alarm
0 = compressor always off ;
100 = compressor always on;
Def
2.0
0
Min
0.1
0
Max UM
20.0 °C/°F
1
-
0
-50.0
200
°C/°F
0
-50.0
200
°C/°F
120
0
250
min
0
0
100
min
LO
HI
A0
A0
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
manual
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
OFF OFF -
-
-
-
-
-
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
-
-
OFF
Tab. 8.e
Low temperature alarm
High temperature alarm
Adjustment probe
Notes:
• The alarm LO and HI are alarms with automatic reset. A0 determines
the hysteresis between the value of the activation and deactivation
of the alarm;
• if you press the Alarm button when the measurement is above a
threshold, the buzzer and the alarm relay immediately turn off, and
an indication of the alarm code will remain active until the measure
falls within the activation threshold. Parameter A6 has similar meaning
as parameter c4 (duty setting). If an external alarm occurs, the
compressor works for a time equal to the value set for parameter A6,
while it remains OFF for a fixed period of 15 minutes.
• In case of relative alarms (A1= 0) both AL and AH are considered as
absolute values (e.g. AL= -10 is considered as AL= 10)
High and low humidity alarms parameters
If either input B4 or B5 is configured for a humidity probe (On), high
(AUH) and low humidity alarms (AUL) can also be enabled, with absolute
thresholds (UHL and ULL). The alarms are activated in the following
conditions:
• If Su >= UHL --> high humidity alarm AUH
• If Su <= ULL --> low humidity alarm AUL
Par
ULL
Description
Def Min Max UM
Absolute low humidity alarm threshold
0
0
100.0 %rH
0=alarm disabled
UHL Absolute high humidity alarm threshold 100.0
0
100.0 %rH
100=alarm disabled
AdH Humidity alarms AUH, AUL delay
120
0
250 min
A1=1
ON
automatic
automatic
automatic
manual
manual
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic automatic automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
ALARM
OFF
AL
Sv
AH
Fig. 8.a
79
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
8.9 HACCP Alarm parameters and
monitoring activation
AH
Sv
In order to activate HACCP alarm monitoring, set parameter HCE=1.
St
HA alarms
The HA alarm is generated if during normal operation it is noted that the
temperature read by the control probe exceeds the high temperature
threshold for the time Ad + Htd. Therefore compared to the normal high
temperature alarm already signalled by the control, HACCP alarm type HA
is delayed by a further Htd time specific for HACCP recording.
Par.
HCE
Htd
Description
Enabling HACCP
0/1=No/Yes
HACCP alarm delay
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
UoM
-
0
0
250
min
t
ALARM
ON
OFF
t
black out
Fig. 8.c
Key
Sv
AH
ALARM
St
t
AH
Sv
Virtual probe
High temperature alarm threshold
HACCP alarm, HF type
Set point
Time
St
t
ALARM
ON
OFF
Ad
Htc
8.10 High condenser temperature alarm
t
You can monitor the temperature of the condenser to signal the high
temperature, probably due to situations of clogging. The signalling
follows the figure below.
Fig. 8.b
Key
Sv
St
t
AH
ALARM
Ad
Htd
Par
Ac
Virtual probe
Set point
Time
High temperature alarm threshold
HACCP alarm, HA type
Delay time for low temperature and high temperature alarms
HACCP alarm delay (0=monitoring disabled)
Acd
Description
High condenser temperature alarm
threshold
High condenser temperature alarm
delay
Def
70
0
Min Max UM
-50,0 200 °C/°F
0
250
Ac+10
Sc
Ac
HF alarms
The HACCP alarm type HF is generated as a result of a power failure for a
long time (> 1 minute), when after mains voltage restore the temperature
read by the adjustment probe exceeds the high temperature threshold
AH .
t
CHT
ON
OFF
Acd
Fig. 8.d
Key
t
Acd
Sc
Ac
CHT
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
80
Time
High condenser temperature alarm delay
Condenser probe
High condenser temperature alarm threshold
High condenser temperature alarm
t
min
ENG
9. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
9.1 UltraCella technical characteristics
Power Supply
Insulation ensured
by 230V power supply
Analog inputs
Analog output
Note:
Probe Type
Probe power supply
Relay output
Connections
Container
Assembly
Display
Keyboard
Clock with buffer battery
Buzzer
Clock
Serial
USB
Model 230V: Voltage 230 V~ (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz; Power 18 VA, 100 mA~ max.
Model 24V: Voltage 24 V~ (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz; Power 18 VA, 1A~ max.
Insulation for low voltage: reinforced, 6 mm in air, 8 mm superficial, 3750 V.
Insulation for relay outputs: reinforced, 3 mm in air, 4 mm superficial, 1250 V.
B1, B2, B3: NTC, PT1000 (+-3%)
B4: NTC, 0...10Vdc (+-3%)
B5: 0...5Vdc ratiometric (+-3%) , 4...20mA (+-3%)
Y1: 0...10 Vdc (10mA max,+-5%)
When installing, keep the supply and loads connections away from the cables of the probes, digital inputs, and monitoring device.
NTC std. CAREL: 10 kΩ at 25°C, range from -50°C to 90°C;
measuring error: 1°C in range from -50°C to +50°C; 3°C in range from +50°C to +90°C
NTC HT: 50 kΩ at 25°C, range from 0°C to 150°C;
measuring error: 1.5°C in range from 0°C to +115°C; 4°C in range from +115°C to +150°C
PT1000 std. CAREL: 1000 Ω at 0°C, range from –50°C to +90°C;
measuring error 3°C in range from –50°C to 0°C; 5°C in range from 0°C to +90°C
+Vdc 12 V+-30%, 25 mA max; 5VREF: 5V+-2%
Applicable ratings based on the relay type
Type of Relay
EN60730 -1 (250 V ~)
UL 873 (250 V ~)
8A (AUX1, AUX2)
8 (4)A on N.O.; 6 (4)A on N.C.; 2 (2)A on N.C. and N.O. (100000
8A resistive 2FLA 12LRA, C300 (30000 cycles)
cycles)
16A,(LIGHT, FAN)
10A resistive, 5 (3)A (100000 cycles)
10A resistive, 5FLA 18LRA (30000 cycles)
30A(COMP, DEF)
12 (10)A (100000 cycles)
12A resistive, 2HP, 12FLA 72LRA (30000 cycles)
NOTE: The sum of the loads currents COMP, DEF, FAN accessed at the same time should not exceed 20A
Insulation for low voltage: reinforced, 6 mm in air, 8 superficial, 3750 V.
Insulation between independent relay outputs: reinforced, 3 mm in air, 4 superficial, 1250 V.
Section of conductors for analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs, serial: from 0.5 to 2.5mm2 (from 20 to 13 AWG);
Section of supply and loads cables: from 1.5 to 2.5 mm2 (from 15 to 13 AWG)
Serial connections:use shielded cables
Maximum length of the cables: 10 m
Plastic: sizes 200 x 100 X 190 mm
On wall (with plastic container): using fastening screws for front board
LED display: 3 and 4 digits, display from -99 to 999; operating status indicated by LEDs and icons formed on the polycarbonate
applied to the plastic
10 keys on keyboard in polycarbonate membrane applied to the plastic
Available depending on the model
Available on all models.
Depending on the model installed.
Accuracy: ±100 ppm
Battery: “button” type with lithium code CR2430 voltage: 3Vdc (sizes 24x3 mm)
3 types of available serials: pLAN, BMS, Fieldbus
PLAN : Driver HW RS485, telephone jack (available only on few models) and screw terminals
BMS Driver HW RS485, screw terminals
Fieldbus: Driver HW RS485, screw terminals
Type: Host (A connector); 5Vdc supply, maximum absorption: 100mA (low power devices)
Operating conditions
Storage conditions
Front protection rating
Environmental pollution
PTI of the isolating materials
Resistance to fire class:
Protection against overcharging class
Type of action and disconnection
Control system manufacture
Classification according to protection against electric shock
Device intended to be hand-held or built into equipment
designed to be hand held
Class and structure of the software
Control front cleaning
Only board: -10T65°C; <90% U.R. non condensing
With plastic container: -10T50°C, <90% U.R. non condensing
Relay identification, type and maximum resistive current to operating temperature:
Relay
Associated load
Type of Relay
Max resistive current applicable
R1
(AUX2)
8A
8A
R2
(AUX1)
8A
8A
R3
(LIGHT)
16A
10A
R4
(FAN)
16A
10A
R5
(DEF)
30A
12A
R6
(COMP)
30A
12A
NOTE: The sum of the loads currents COMP, DEF, FAN accessed at the same time should not
exceed 20A.
-20T70°C, < 90% U.R. non condensing
With plastic container: IP65
2, normal situation
Printed circuits 250, plastic and insulation materials 175
Category D
Category II, without PE terminal
Category I, with PE terminal
Relay contact 1 B (micro-disconnection)
Incorporated, electronic control device
Class II by means of appropriate incorporation
No
Class A
Only use neutral detergents and water
Tab. 9.a
81
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
9.2 EVD Modules technical characteristics
Power supply
Classification according to protection against
electric shock
Case
Front protection rating with plastic case
Fire resistance category
Cleaning the module front panel
Operating conditions
Storage conditions
PTI of insulating materials
voltage: 230 V~ (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz; power: 4,5kW max.
NOTE: The maximum simultaneous current draw by all the loads connected to the controller and the
expansion modules must not exceed 20 A.
Class II
plastic, dimensions 128x290x110 mm
IP65
category D
only use neutral detergents and water
-10T40°C, <90% r.H. non condensing
-20T60°C, <90% r.H. non condensing
printed circuits 250, plastic and insulating materials 175
Tab. 9.b
9.3 Power Modules technical characteristics
Power supply
Residual current circuit breaker
Power relay
Classification according to protection against electric shock
Case
Front protection rating with plastic case
Fire resistance category
Cleaning the module front panel
Operating conditions
Storage conditions
voltage: 230 V~ (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz; power: 4,5kW max.
NOTE: The maximum simultaneous current draw by all the loads connected to the controller and
the expansion modules must not exceed 20 A
In=20 A @30 °C, Id=300 mA
Rating: 30 A resistive, 240 Vac; 3HP 240 Vac
Class II
plastic, dimensions 128x290x110 mm
IP65
Category D
only use neutral detergents and water
-10T40°C, <90% r.H. non condensing
-20T60°C, <90% r.H. non condensing
Tab. 9.c
9.4 3PH EVAPORATOR Modules technical characteristics
Power supply
Classification according to protection against electric shock
Case
Weight
Front protection rating with plastic case
Cleaning the module front panel
Operating conditions
Storage conditions
Materials
voltage: 400V~(+10/-15%), 50/60Hz, 3PH+N+T, Imax 25A
Class I
plastic, dimensions 452x380x186 mm
8,7 Kg
IP65
only use neutral detergents and water
-10T40°C, <90% r.H. non condensing
-20T60°C, <90% r.H. non condensing
frontal cover in polycarbonate, retro box in technopolymer
Tab. 9.d
9.4.1
Electrical characteristics
Code
General
Main switch / general protection
Loads power supply
Insulating transformer
Status and alarm indication
Input
Main defrost probe
Auxiliary evap. defrost probe
Clicson evaporator
Thermostat evaporator
Output
Condensing unit enabling / Solenoid valve
Defrost heaters
Evaporator fans
AUX1 output
Ultra 3PH Evaporator module 6kW
WT00E600N0
Ultra 3PH Evaporator module 9kW
WT00E900N0
Ultra 3PH Evaporator module 20kW
WT00EA00N0
4-pole circuit breaker 16A 6kA D
400V~(±10%), 50/60Hz, 3PH+N+T
PRI 230 Vac
SEC1 230 Vac 40VA
SEC2 24 Vac 35VA
SEC protection by fuses
By UltraCella
4-pole circuit breaker25A 6KA D
400V~(±10%), 50/60Hz, 3PH+N+T
PRI 230 Vac
SEC1 230 Vac 40VA
SEC2 24 Vac 35VA
SEC protection by fuses
By UltraCella
4-pole circuit breaker 40A 6KA D
400V~(±10%), 50/60Hz, 3PH+N+T
PRI 230 Vac
SEC1 230 Vac 40VA
SEC2 24 Vac 35VA
SEC protection by fuses
by UltraCella
NTC 10kΩ
NTC 10kΩ
Present
Present
NTC 10kΩ
NTC 10kΩ
Present
Present
NTC 10kΩ
NTC 10kΩ
Present
Present
8A (AC1) / 2A (AC23) 1PH
6kW, 9A (AC1) 3PH
0,55kW, 1,5A* (AC23) 3PH
0…10Vdc
16A (AC1) 1PH
8A (AC1) / 2A (AC23) 1PH
9kW, 13A (AC1) 3PH
2kW, 5,7A* (AC23) 3PH
0…10Vdc
16A (AC1) 1PH
8A (AC1) / 2A (AC23) 1PH
20kW, 28A (AC1) 3PH
4kW, 9,6A* (AC23) 3PH
0…10Vdc
16A (AC1) 1PH
Tab. 9.e
* Rating with cosφ=0,5;
With different power factor, to calculate the rating consider the formula: I = P / (400 * √3 * cosφ) where P is the power in W
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
82
ENG
9.5 3PH FULL Modules technical characteristics
Power supply
Classification according to protection against electric shock
Case
Weight
Front protection rating with plastic case
Cleaning the module front panel
Operating conditions
Storage conditions
Materials
voltage: 400V~(+10/-15%), 50/60Hz, 3PH+N+T, Imax 25A
Class I
plastic, dimensions 452x380x186 mm
9,8 Kg
IP65
only use neutral detergents and water
-10T40°C, <90% r.H. non condensing
-20T60°C, <90% r.H. non condensing
frontal cover in polycarbonate, retro box in technopolymer
Tab. 9.f
9.5.1
Electrical characteristics
Code
General
Main switch / general protection
Loads power supply
Insulating transformer
Status and alarm indication
Regulation range of compressor current rating
Input
Main defrost probe
Auxiliary evap. defrost probe
Condensing probe
Partial condenser
Pump down
High/Low pressure
Kriwan compressor
Clicson evaporator
Thermostat evaporator
Output
Compressor
Oil compressor heater (Carter)
Condensing fans
Defrost heaters
Evaporator fans
AUX1 output
Solenoid valve
Ultra 3PH Full module 4HP
WT00F4B0N0
Ultra 3PH Full module 7.5HP
WT00F7C0N0
4 poles magnetothermic 16A 6kA D
400V~ (±10%), 50/60Hz, 3PH+N+T
PRI 230 Vac
SEC1 230 Vac 40VA
SEC2 24 Vac 35VA
Protection SEC by fuses
By UltraCella
10…16A (AC3) 3PH
4 poles magnetothermic 25A 6KA D
400V~ (±10%), 50/60Hz, 3PH+N+T
PRI 230 Vac
SEC1 230 Vac 40VA
SEC2 24 Vac 35VA
Protection SEC by fuses
By UltraCella
16…20A (AC3) 3PH
NTC 10kΩ
NTC 10kΩ
NTC 10kΩ
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
NTC 10kΩ
NTC 10kΩ
NTC 10kΩ
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
10...16A (AC3) 3PH
100W, 0,5A (AC1) 1PH
0,8kW, 4A (AC15) 1PH
6kW, 9A (AC1) 3PH
0,55kW, 1,5A* (AC23) 3PH
0…10Vdc
16A (AC1) 1PH
Present
16...20A (AC3) 3PH
100W, 0,5A (AC1) 1PH
0,8kW, 4A (AC15) 1PH
9kW, 13A (AC1) 3PH
2kW, 5,7A* (AC23) 3PH
0…10Vdc
16A (AC1) 1PH
Present
Tab. 9.g
* Rating with cosφ=0,5;
With different power factor, to calculate the rating consider the formula: I = P / (400 * √3 * cosφ) where P is the power in W
83
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
10. ELECTRICAL WIRING 3PH MODULES
10.1 Electrical wiring 3PH EVAPORATOR Module
10.1.1 Power circuit
5
8
CYAN
RR1
1
4
4/A1
4/B1
Fig. 10.a
3P+N+T 400V 50/60HZ
6
POWER SUPPLY
BROWN
2
7
1
3
L1
4
4
GRAY
3
KM2
5/D3
6
XP1
1
DEFROST HEATERS
2
L2
CYAN
L3
4
6
5
5
6
8
QF1
BROWN
7
3
W
N
PE
XP1
3
PER UNA CORRETTA INSTALLAZIONE
ELETTRICA SI RACCOMANDA
DI INSTALLARE A MONTE
DEL SEZIONATORE PRESENTE
SUL QUADRO, UNA PROTEZIONE
MAGNETOTERMICA DIFFERENZIALE
4
I d
FOR THE RIGHT INSTALLATION
IS RECOMMENDED A DIFFERENTIAL
BREAKER SWITCH MOUNTED
UPSTREAM THE GENERAL ISOLATOR
OF THIS PANEL
GRAY
84
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
KM1
2
V
EVAPORATOR FANS
WHITE
5
5/D4
1
XP1
2
1
I d
MACHINE LIMIT
MV1
M
WHITE
U
I d
I d
ENG
10.1.2 Power circuit
3/A8
3/B8
1
4
MACHINE LIMIT
WHITE
CYAN
QF2
2
1
N2
N1
WHITE
CYAN
TC1
0(O1)
FU1
RED
230(O1)
FU2
0(I)
RED
0(O2)
FU3
230
RED
24(O2)
FU4
40VA
35VA
16
15
RED
PE
14
13
XA1
5/D1
5/E1
PE1
7/C1
7/C1
Fig. 10.b
85
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
10.1.3 Auxiliary circuit
J11/NO3
KM1
J11/C3/4/5
J11/C3/4/5
J11/NO5
KR2
J12/NO6
J12/C6
XA1
KR2
5/D7
XA1
XA1
AUX1
MAX 16A AC1
MACHINE LIMIT
Fig. 10.c
J12
J12/NC6
KR3
5/D5
XA1
AUX2
CONSENT
UNIT
CONDENSING
12
J11
J11/NO4
KR3
XA1
14
Ultra 3PH I/O module
J10/NO2
KM2
XA1
12
J10
RED
J10/C1/2
16
RED
J10/NO1
15
XA1
ORANGE
110
2
14
ORANGE 11
109
1
ORANGE
149
2
A1
A2
ORANGE 11
148
1
A1
A2
86
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
4/D8
4/E8
XA1
ULTRACELLA
AP3
129
N
128
L
A1
A2
SP3
P
120
EVAPORATOR CLICSON
119
XA1
TS1
118
SECURITY THERMOSTAT
117
A1
A2
ENG
10.1.4 Auxiliary circuit
J2/U2
XA1
J2/U3
J2/GND
RED
J2/U4
J2/U5
J2
J2/U6
XA1
TS2
J2/GND
XA1
J2/U7
J2/U8
J2/U9
J2/U10
J2/GND
MACHINE LIMIT
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
87
Ultra 3PH I/O module
J2/U1
RED
XA1
Y
GND
FANS EVAPORATORE 0-10VDC
147
RED
146
XA1
ST2
143
DEFROST AUX
142
XA1
DEFROST
141
RED
ST1
140
Fig. 10.d
ENG
10.1.5 Auxiliary circuit
AP1
RED
J1/G0
J1
J1/G
J1/VBAT
J6/-
J6
J6/+
J6/GND
BELDEN
J9/+5VREF
J9
J9/GND
J11/+VDC
Fig. 10.e
Ultra 3PH I/O module
13
MACHINE LIMIT
88
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
4/D8
4/D8
XA1
AP
485 ULTRACELLA
162
GND
161
+
160
-
RED
ENG
10.1.6 Connection for operation with power to
solenoid valve
149
148
129
liquid valve
N
L
128
If the solenoid valve requires power, the 230 Vac power supply available at
terminals 128-129 can be used, as shown in the following wiring diagram:
89
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
Terminals
XP1
XA1
RR1
Defrost heaters
AUX1:1
AUX1:2
TS1
TS1
SP3
SP3
AP3:L
AP3:N
ST1
ST1
ST2
ST2
Y
TS2:Y
GND
TS2:GND
AUX2:1
AUX2:2
AP1:J6/+
AP1:J6/+
GND AP1:J6/GND
RR1
Defrost heaters
AUX 1
AUX 1
Safe thermostat
Safe thermostat
Evaporator fans clicson
Evaporator fans clicson
UltraCella
UltraCella
defrost
defrost
defrost aux
defrost aux
Evaporator fans 0...10Vdc
Evaporator fans 0...10Vdc
Condensing unit enabling
Condensing unit enabling
Control
Control
Control
RR1
Defrost heaters
MV1:U
MV1:V
MV1:W
RR1
M
Defrost heaters
Evaporator fans
Evaporator fans
Evaporator fans
Number and description
1
2
Evaporator fans
3
5
6
Defrost heaters
7
8
PE
Ground terminal
109
AUX1 relay
110
117
Safe thermostat evaporator fans
118
119
Clicson evaporator fans
120
128
Power supply 230Vac for UltraCella
129
140
Defrost probe NTC
141
142
Defrost probe NTC aux evaporator
143
146
0…10V for evaporator fans (signal)
147
0…10V for evaporator fans (GND)
148
Condensing unit enabling / Solenoid valve
149
160
RS485 161
RS485 +
162
RS485 GND
PE1
PE2
Ground terminals
PE3
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
18
90
34
33
32
24
25
29
31
29
30
29
28
15
16
22
19
20
1
PE3
PE2
PE1
162
161
160
149
148
147
146
143
142
141
140
129
128
120
119
118
117
110
109
PE
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
5
4
10
9
8
4
7
6
17
34
33
32
24
25
29
31
29
30
29
28
15
16
22
19
20
18
26
27
terminal block
XP1
26
27
4
10
9
8
7
6
5
KR2:11
KR2:14
??:J10/NO1
KM2:A1
??:J10/NO2
KM1:A1
FU2:2/??:J12/NC6
KR1:A2/KR2:A2
??:J2/U1
XA1:143
??:J2/U2
XA1:141/??:J2/GND
??:J2/U6
??:J2/GND
KR1:11
KR1:14
AP:AP:+
AP:GND
TC1:PE
QF1:8
KM2:6
KM2:4
KM2:2
KM1:2
KM1:4
KM1:6
QF1:8/QF2:N1
ENG
10.1.7 Terminal units
terminal block
XA1
Fig. 10.f
Notes
-
-
-
Normally closed. If active (open), evaporator fans are off and it’s not notified in
UltraCella
Normally closed. If active (open), evaporator fans are off and it’s not notified in
UltraCella
To supply UltraCella
-
-
-
-
Fieldbus - connection to UltraCella
-
Tab. 10.a
ENG
10.2 Electrical wiring 3PH FULL Module
10.2.1 Power circuit
3
W
3
BROWN
6
5
4
CYAN
3
7
BROWN
6
5
8
CYAN
RR1
1
4
4/A1
4/B1
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
91
WHITE
4
GRIGIO
GRAY
BROWN
CYAN
KM2
5/D3
6
XP1
1
DEFROST HEATERS
2
3P+N+T 400V 50/60HZ
4
POWER SUPPLY
GRAY
XP1
MV1
M
2
EVAPORATOR FANS
V
L1
1
2
2
1
1
WHITE
U
L2
6
4
BROWN
3
5
L3
6
6
8
BROWN
5
QF1
11
W
N
7
QM1
4
I >
GRAY
I >
3
I >
KM1
4
5/D4
GRAY
XP1
KM3
10
V
COMPRESSOR
WHITE
5
5/D5
2
9
XP1
MV2
M
WHITE
5
1
3
2
1
WHITE
U
PER UNA CORRETTA INSTALLAZIONE
ELETTRICA SI RACCOMANDA
DI INSTALLARE A MONTE
DEL SEZIONATORE PRESENTE
SUL QUADRO, UNA PROTEZIONE
MAGNETOTERMICA DIFFERENZIALE
FOR THE RIGHT INSTALLATION
IS RECOMMENDED A DIFFERENTIAL
BREAKER SWITCH MOUNTED
UPSTREAM THE GENERAL ISOLATOR
OF THIS PANEL
MACHINE LIMIT
PE
I d
I d
I d
I d
Fig. 10.g
ENG
10.2.2 Power circuit
XA1
XA1
PE
KM3
5/D5
XA1
RR2
CRANKCASE HEATER
(Carter)
TC1
FU1
RED
230(O1)
FU2
0(I)
RED
0(O2)
FU3
230
RED
24(O2)
FU4
25
PE
23
22
7/C1
7/C1
PE3
Fig. 10.h
XA1
5/D1
5/E1
PE1
35VA
0(O1)
24
PE2
40VA
RED
WHITE
XA1
2
M
1
1
108
1
CYAN
CYAN
WHITE
4
QF2
KM3
PE
MV4
CONDENSER FANS 2
92
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
61
62
107
5/D5
2
SP1
P
106
XA1
1
M
800W MAX
105
N1
N2
3/A8
3/B8
MACHINE LIMIT
MV3
1
102
CONDENSER FANS 1
104
PARTIALIZATION PRESSURE SWITCH CONDENSER FAN
103
13
14
101
1
2
ENG
10.2.3 Auxiliary circuit
J10/NO2
KM2
J11/NO3
KM1
J11/C3/4/5
XA1
XA1
J11/C3/4/5
XA1
XA1
J11/NO5
XA1
XA1
XA1
KR2
J12/NO6
J12/C6
XA1
AUX1
MAX 16A AC1
MACHINE LIMIT
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
93
J12
J12/NC6
KR2
5/D7
XA1
12
J11
J11/NO4
KM3
XA1
14
11
J10
J10/C1/2
KR1
XA1
AP3
ULTRACELLA
ORANGE
110
2
A1
A2
ORANGE
109
1
A1
A2
Ultra 3PH I/O module
J10/NO1
RED
XA1
YV1
LIQUID VALVE
127
XA1
126
XA1
124
PUMP DOWN
TK1
125
A1
A2
SP3
VEDI PG.9
123
A1
A2
122
XA1
TS1
121
25
SP2
P
120
EVAPORATOR CLICSON
119
A1
P
118
SECURITY THERMOSTAT
117
RED
AP2
116
24
114
4/D8
4/E8
111
A2
PRESSURE SWITCH
115
XA1
113
KRIWAN
129
N
128
L
112
L
N
11
12
14
Fig. 10.i
ENG
10.2.4 Auxiliary circuit
J2/U3
XA1
J2/GND
RED
J2/U4
J2/U5
KR1
5/D2
GND
J2
J2/U6
XA1
J2/GND
XA1
J2/U7
J2/U8
J2/U9
J2/U10
J2/GND
MACHINE LIMIT
Fig. 10.j
RED
11
14
RED
QM1
3/B4
12
RED
14
13
RED
Ultra 3PH I/O module
J2/U2
XA1
TS2
94
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
J2/U1
XA1
Y
EVAPORATOR FANS 0...10VDC
147
RED
146
XA1
ST3
CONDENSER PROBE
145
RED
144
XA1
ST2
DEFROST AUX PROBE
143
RED
142
XA1
ST1
DEFROST PROBE
141
RED
140
ENG
10.2.5 Auxiliary circuit
J1
J1/G0
J1/VBAT
Ultra 3PH I/O module
J1/G
RED
J6/-
J6
J6/+
J6/GND
BELDEN
J9/+5VREF
J9
J9/GND
J11/+VDC
MACHINE LIMIT
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
95
23
22
XA1
RS485 FIELDBUS TO ULTRACELLA
AP
162
GND
161
+
160
-
4/D8
4/D8
RED
Fig. 10.k
ENG
10.2.6 Connection for Pump Down or thermostat
working
127
126
125
124
122
127
126
125
124
123
121
123
Connections for pump down controlled by pressure, with
simultaneous activation of the compressor and solenoid valve
If the pump down procedure needs to be performed, controlled by
pressure via a pressure switch connected to the Ultra 3PH Full threephase module rather than UltraCella, with simultaneous actvation and
deactivation of the compressor and solenoid valve, the connections are
as shown in the following diagram.
Connections for pump down controlled by pressure, with
compressor shutdown due to low pressure
If the pump down procedure needs to be performed, controlled by
pressure via a pressure switch connected to the Ultra 3PH Full threephase module rather than UltraCella, and the compressor shuts down
due to low pressure, the connections are as shown in the following
diagram.
P
liquid valve
pump down pressure switch
low pressure switch
bridge
liquid valve
pump down pressure switch
low pressure switch
bridge
P
Fig. 9.g
Fig. 9.e
With this configuration, when there is no cooling request from UltraCella
(Sv<St), the solenoid valve (terminals 126-127) and the compressor (KM3)
are simultaneously deactivated. In normal operation, when the pressure
switch measures measures the low pressure threshold, the compressor
is shut down.
With this configuration, when there is no cooling request from UltraCella
(Sv<St), the solenoid valve (terminals 126-127) opens, while the
compressor (KM3) remains on until the pressure switch measures the low
pressure threshold (TK1, terminals 124-125).
Fig. 9.f
Fig. 9.h
Note: as the pressure switch is connected to the Ultra 3PH Full
three-phase module, do not enable pump down on UltraCella (set c7=0,
H1≠5, H5≠5).
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
Nota: Do not enable pump down on UltraCella (set c7=0, H1≠5,
H5≠5).
96
ENG
liquid valve
110
109
129
N
128
liquid valve
bridge
bridge
L
125
124
122
Connections for timed pump down
If the pump down procedure needs to be performed based on a time
setting, with the solenoid valve connected to the Ultra 3PH Full threephase module rather than UltraCella, the connections are as shown in
the following diagram.
127
126
125
124
123
122
Connections for pump down with simultaneous activation of the
compressor and solenoid valve
If the pump down procedure needs to be performed, with simultaneous
actvation and deactivation of the compressor and solenoid valve and
without a pressure switch, the connections are as shown in the following
diagram.
Fig. 9.k
On UltraCella, configure:
• H1 = 5 (output AUX1, terminals 109-110, for pump down valve)
• c10 = 1 (timed pump down)
• c7 > 0 (pump down time)
With this configuration, when there is no cooling request from UltraCella
(Sv<St), the solenoid valve (terminals 109-110, output AUX1 on UltraCella)
opens, while the compressor (KM3) remains on for the time defined by
parameter c7
Fig. 9.i
With this configuration, when there is no cooling request from UltraCella
(Sv<St), the solenoid valve (terminals 126-127) and the compressor (KM3)
are simultaneously deactivated.
Fig. 9.j
Nota: Do not enable pump down on UltraCella (set c7=0, H1≠5,
H5≠5).
Fig. 9.l
97
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
Term.
XP1
4
M
Number and description
1
2
Evaporator fans
3
5
6
Defrost heaters
7
8
9
10
Compressor
11
PE2
Ground terminal
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
10
11
MV2:U
MV2:V
MV2:W
1
M
P
L
N
Fig. 10.l
Note
-
-
-
-
98
M
P
P
TK1
TK1
YV1
YV1
ULTRACELLA:L
ULTRACELLA:N
ST1
ST1
ST2
ST2
ST3
ST3
Y
7AP1:Y
GND 7AP1:GND
AP1:J6/+
AP1:J6/+
GND AP1:J6/GND
1
48
47
46
40
45
40
42
40
41
40
39
24
25
24
32
34
35
35
33
30
31
27
29
28
28
25
24
25
37
38
18
21
18
20
20
19
18
9
RR1
MV3:1
MV3:2
SP1
SP1
MV4:1
MV4:2
RR2
RR2
AUX1:1
AUX1:2
AP2:L
AP2:N
AP2:11
AP2:14
SP2
SP2
TS1
TS1
SP3
SP3
8
RR1
PE109
162
161
160
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
129
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
PE2
6
7
RR1
5
19
1
3
2
RR1
MV1:U
MV1:V
MV1:W
26
48
47
46
40
45
40
42
40
41
40
39
24
25
24
32
34
35
32
29
33
30
31
27
29
28
28
25
24
25
37
38
18
21
18
20
20
19
18
19
terminal block
XP1
pump down
pump down
liquid valve
liquid valve
ultracella
ultracella
defrost probe
defrost probe
defrost probe auxiliary evap.
defrost probe auxiliary evap.
condenser probe
condenser probe
evaporator fans 0...10Vdc
evaporator fans 0...10Vdc
control
control
control
condenser fans 1
condenser fans 1
partialization pressure switch condenser fan
partialization pressure switch condenser fan
condenser fans 2
condenser fans 2
crankcase heater
crankcase heater
aux 1
aux 1
kriwan
kriwan
kriwan
kriwan
pressure switch
pressure switch
security thermostat
security thermostat
evaporator clicson
evaporator clicson
compressor
M
compressor
compressor
defrost heaters
defrost heaters
defrost heaters
defrost heaters
evaporator fans
evaporator fans
evaporator fans
KM3:A1
XA1:122
KM3:A2/XA1:129
??:J12/NC6/XA1:113
XA1:127/KR2:A2
??:J2/U1
XA1:143
??:J2/U2
XA1:145/XA1:141
??:J2/U3
??:J2/GND/XA1:143
??:J2/U6
KR1:11
AP:AP:+
AP:GND
TC1:PE
XA1:103
QF2:N2/XA1:106
XA1:101/KM3:14
XA1:105
XA1:104
XA1:108/XA1:102
KM3:62
XA1:106
KR2:11
KR2:14
FU2:2/XA1:113
KR1:A2/FU1:2
XA1:128/XA1:111
XA1:115
XA1:114
KR1:A1
??:J10/NO1
KM2:A1
??:J10/NO2
KM1:A1
??:J11/C3/4/5
XA1:126/??:J11/NO3
KM3:6
KM3:4
KM3:2
QF1:8
KM2:6
KM2:4
KM2:2
KM1:2
KM1:4
KM1:6
QF1:8/QF2:N1
ENG
10.2.7 Terminal units
terminal block
XA1
ENG
101
Condensing fans 1
102
103
Pressure switch condensing fans partialization
104
105
Condensing fans 2
106
107
Manual
Availability
UltraCella Notes
Oil compressorFunctions
heater (Carter)
release 108 date
Software
109
UX1 relay
release
110
111 28/02/2014
1.1
Basic cold room management: compressor, defrost, evaporator fans, light, 1.1
UltraCella single digit display
112
2xAUX relays
Kriwan
113
Single digit display management
114
115
High/low Pressure
switch
Commissioning
UltraCella through both built-in
LED display and pGD1
116
UltraCella Service
117
Safe thermostat evaporator fans
Normally closed. If active (open), evaporator fans are off and it’s not notified in UltraCella
118
Commissioning through wizard on pGD1
XA1
119
Clicson evaporator
fans
Normally closed. If active (open), evaporator fans are off and it’s not notified in UltraCella
Upload/Download
parameters via USB key
120
124
Defrost
schedule
by
RTC
Pump Down
125
HACCP alarms
126
Solenoid valve
127
Maximum and minimum temperature recording
128
Power supply 230Vac for UltraCella
To supply UltraCella
129
Diagnosis: I/O status visualization
140
Defrost probe Second
NTC
step compressor with automatic rotation
141
142
fans in PWM mode (on/off ) with
Defrost probe Evaporator
NTC aux evaporator
- compressor off
143
146
0…10V for evaporator
(signal) management
Auxiliaryfans
evaporator
147
0…10V for evaporator fans (GND)
Smart
light
management
by
door
switch
160
RS485 161
RS485 +
Connection RS485 Fieldbus to UltraCella
Bowl heater activation
162
RS485 GND
PE109 Ground terminal
Condenser fan activation by temperature-
11. SOFTWARE RELEASE
11.1 Software release table
Tab. 10.b
Pump down management
Humidity probe reading
Pre-charged configurations (recipes)
Software update through pGD1
1.3
30/06/2014
Double digit display management
1.2
UltraCella double digit display (software
release 1.2) availability in production:
11/04/2014
1.3
UltraCella software 1.3 availability in
production: 30/06/2014
"Bugfixing:
Input B5 Humidity reading
High/low temp. alarm delay
EVD communication in manual OFF status"
1.4
UltraCella software 1.4 availability in
production: 03/11/2014
3PH expansion module management (one to one)
1.5
UltraCella software 1.5 availability in
production: 22/12/2014
Data logging function (one temperature)
Humidity ON/OFF output
Serial connection UltraCella - EVD EVO (only "start command")
Service menu on pGD1 (diagnosis)
Navigation improvements on both LED and pGD1
Added alarm indication on USB functions (in case of bad working)
Commissioning EVD EVO via UltraCella
Defrost by dI (fixed interval time) enable with RTC defrost set too
Limit and default parameter setting change (H0, /t2, dd, Fd)
0…10V output for variable speed evaporator fans
1.5
30/01/2015
Data logging: 2 selectable temperatures, variable sampling time
Log of stored alarms
BMS serial line: Modbus / Carel protocols selectable
Software update by built-in LED display
Addition of pGD texts in German and French
New default /A2=1 (defrost probe configured in B2)
New default settings for EVD module (push from UltraCella)
Door switch disabling (new question in wizard and new parameter A3)
99
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
ENG
1.6
31/10/2015
0 to 10 V output for variable speed condenser fans managed by pressure/
temperature + floating condensing) algorithm
1.6
UltraCella software 1.6 availability in
production: 27/07/2015
1.7
UltraCella software 1.7 availability in
production: 20/11/2015
1.9 / 2.0
UltraCella software release 2.0 availability
in production:
30/01/2017
Heating/cooling control with dead band
EVDice configuration from UltraCella
Generic functions
Auxiliary output activation by time bands
Set point variation by time bands / from digital input
Set point ramps
Humidity data logging
High / low humidity alarm management
Possibility to disable alarms Ed1 / Ed2 (parameter A8)
Additional pGD texts in Spanish
Alarms on high/low humidity levels
AUX1/AUX2 icon on active display when corresponding relay output
active
PMU variable (% valve opening in manual mode for EVD EVO) visible on
built-in LED display
1.7
07/01/2016
Improved EVDice management: management of signatures to protect
custom configurations
Configuration of BMS serial parameters
Language selection as first question in wizard
Addition of EVD EVO MOP parameters on UltraCella LED display
New default configuration for communication between UltraCella and
3PH modules
Door microswitch disabled by default (A3=1)
Parameter IPE (enable EVDice communication with UltraCella) available
on supervisor
2.0
31/03/2017
Compatibility with new refrigerants
Humidity, humidification and dehumidification management
Improved heating management
Implementation of serious alarm SA
Improved fan management
Output (relay) configuration
Smooth lines & floating suction
Third generic ON/OFF function added
Tab. 11.a
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
100
CAREL INDUSTRIES S.p.A.
Via dell’Industria, 11 - 35020 Brugine - Padova (Italy)
Tel. (+39) 049.9716611 - Fax (+39) 049.9716600
e-mail: [email protected] - www.carel.com
UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017
Agenzia / Agency:
">